ْ  ٓ :    ¼ +   ‫ق‬% ‫ك‬

Macro Reference
Record of Revisions

Reference numbers are shown at the bottom left corner on the back cover of each manual.

Date Reference No. Revised Contents

May, 2014 1071NE0 First edition

Preface
Congratulations on purchasing the MONITOUCH V series.
The “V Series Macro Reference” manual describes macro functions used on the drawing/editing software (V-SFT
version 6) for the MONITOUCH V series. For a correct use of the product, read this manual thoroughly.

Notes:

1. The copyright of the software is possessed by Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd.

2. Reproduction of the contents of the software and this manual, in whole or in part, without permission
of Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd. is prohibited.
3. The specifications of the software and the information in this manual are subject to change without
prior notice.
4. If the specifications of the software do not correspond with the contents of this manual, the software
specifications have priority.
5. No liability is assumed by Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd. with respect to the influence brought by the
result of using the software or this manual.
6. You may use this software on a single central processing unit.

About Trademarks:
• Windows, Word and Excel are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
• All other company names or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective holders.
• The names of the products contained herein are trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective manufacturers.
About Manuals
The following manuals are available for the MONITOUCH V series.
Refer to them as necessary.

Manual Name Reference No. Contents

V9 Series Macro Reference An overview of macros of V-SFT version 6 as well
(this manual) 1071NEx as macro editor operations and macro command
descriptions are explained.
V9 Series Reference Manual [1] 1065NEx The functions and instructions of the V9 series are
explained.
V9 Series Reference Manual [2] 1066NEx
V9 Series Errors and operation procedures of the V9 series
1068NEx
Troubleshooting/Maintenance Manual are explained.
V9 Series Hardware Specifications Notes on usage and hardware specifications for
2023NEx
the V9 series are explained.
V9 Series Connection Manual [1] 2210NEx The connection and communication parameters for
the V9 series and controllers are explained in
V9 Series Connection Manual [2] 2211NEx detail.
V9 Series Connection Manual [3] 2212NEx
V Series Models

The following V9 series models are available:

Generic Name Series Model

V9100iS
V9 Standard
V9080iS
V9 series
V9010iC
V9 Lite
V9080iC

Please note that the V series model names are used as listed above in the manuals.
 Notes on Safe Usage of MONITOUCH

In this manual, you will find various notes categorized under the following levels with the signal words “DANGER”
and “CAUTION”.

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
DANGER serious injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or
CAUTION moderate injury and could cause property damage.

Note that there is a possibility that items listed with CAUTION may have serious ramifications.

DANGER
 Never use the output signal of the V9 series for operations that may threaten human life or damage the
system, such as signals used in case of emergency. Please design the system so that it can cope with a
touch switch malfunction. A touch switch malfunction may result in machine accidents or damage.
 Turn off the power supply when you set up the unit, connect new cables, or perform maintenance or
inspections. Otherwise, electrical shock or damage may occur.
 Never touch any terminals while the power is on. Otherwise, electrical shock may occur.
 You must cover the terminals on the unit before turning the power on and operating the unit. Otherwise,
electrical shock may occur.
 The liquid crystal in the LCD panel is a hazardous substance. If the LCD panel is damaged, do not ingest the
leaked liquid crystal. If leaked liquid crystal makes contact with skin or clothing, wash it away with soap and
water.
 Never disassemble, recharge, deform by pressure, short-circuit, reverse the polarity of the lithium battery,
nor dispose of the lithium battery in fire. Failure to follow these conditions will lead to explosion or ignition.
 Never use a lithium battery that is deformed, leaking, or shows any other signs of abnormality. Failure to
follow these conditions will lead to explosion or ignition.
 The power lamp flashes when the backlight has reached the end of its service life or when the backlight is
faulty. Note that the switches on the screen remain operable when this occurs. Do not touch the screen
when the screen becomes dark and the power lamp is flashing. Otherwise, a malfunction may occur and
result in machine accidents or damage.

CAUTION
 Check the appearance of the unit when it is unpacked. Do not use the unit if any damage or deformation is
found. Failure to do so may lead to fire, damage, or malfunction.
 For use in a facility or as part of a system related to nuclear energy, aerospace, medical, traffic equipment, or
mobile installations, please consult your local distributor.
 Operate (or store) the V9 series under the conditions indicated in this manual and related manuals. Failure
to do so could cause fire, malfunction, physical damage, or deterioration.
 Observe the following environmental restrictions on use and storage of the unit. Otherwise, fire or damage to
the unit may result.
- Avoid locations where there is a possibility that water, corrosive gas, flammable gas, solvents, grinding
fluids, or cutting oil can come into contact with the unit.
- Avoid high temperatures, high humidity, and outside weather conditions, such as wind, rain, or direct
sunlight.
- Avoid locations where excessive dust, salt, and metallic particles are present.
- Avoid installing the unit in a location where vibrations or physical shocks may be transmitted.
 CAUTION
 Equipment must be correctly mounted so that the main terminal of the V9 series will not be touched
inadvertently. Otherwise, an accident or electric shock may occur.
 Tighten the mounting screw on the fixtures of the V9 series to an equal torque of 0.6 N·m.
Excessive tightening may distort the panel surface. Loose mounting screws may cause the unit to fall down,
malfunction, or short-circuit.
 Check periodically that terminal screws on the power supply terminal block and fixtures are firmly tightened.
Loosened screws or nuts may result in fire or malfunction.
 Tighten the terminal screws on the power supply terminal block of the V9 series to an equal torque of 7.1 to
8.8 inch-lbf (0.8 to 1.0 N·m). Improper tightening of screws may result in fire, malfunction, or other serious
trouble.
 The V9 series has a glass screen. Do not drop the unit or impart physical shocks to the unit. Otherwise, the
screen may be damaged.
 Correctly connect cables to the terminals of the V9 series in accordance with the specified voltage and
wattage. Overvoltage, overwattage, or incorrect cable connection could cause fire, malfunction, or damage
to the unit.
 Always ground the V9 series. The FG terminal must be used exclusively for the V9 series with the level of
grounding resistance less than 100 . Otherwise, electric shock or a fire may occur.
 Prevent any conductive particles from entering the V9 series. Failure to do so may lead to fire, damage, or
malfunction.
 After wiring is finished, remove the paper used as a dust cover before starting operation of the V9 series.
Operation with the dust cover attached may result in accidents, fire, malfunction, or other trouble.
 Do not attempt to repair the V9 series yourself. Contact Hakko Electronics or the designated contractor for
repairs.
 Do not repair, disassemble, or modify the V9 series. Hakko Electronics Co., Ltd. is not responsible for any
damages resulting from repair, disassembly, or modification of the unit that was performed by an
unauthorized person.
 Do not use sharp-pointed tools to press touch switches. Doing so may damage the display unit.
 Only experts are authorized to set up the unit, connect cables, and perform maintenance and inspection.
 Lithium batteries contain combustible material such as lithium and organic solvents. Mishandling may cause
heat, explosion, or ignition resulting in fire or injury. Read the related manuals carefully and correctly handle
the lithium battery as instructed.
 Do not press two or more positions on the screen at the same time. If two or more positions are pressed at
the same time, the switch located between the pressed positions may be activated.
 Take safety precautions during operations such as changing settings when the unit is running, forced output,
and starting and stopping the unit. Any misoperations may cause unexpected machine movement, resulting
in machine accidents or damage.
 In facilities where the failure of the V9 series could lead to accidents that threaten human life or other serious
damage, be sure that such facilities are equipped with adequate safeguards.
 When disposing of the V9 series, it must be treated as industrial waste.
 Before touching the V9 series, discharge static electricity from your body by touching grounded metal.
Excessive static electricity may cause malfunction or trouble.
 Insert an SD card into the unit in the same orientation as pictured on the unit. Failure to do so may damage
the SD card or the slot on the unit.
 The SD card access LED flashes red when the SD card is being accessed. Never remove the SD card or
turn off power to the unit while the LED is flashing. Doing so may destroy the data on the SD card. Check
that the LED has turned off before removing the SD card or turning off the power to the unit.
[General Notes]
 Never bundle control cables or input/output cables with high-voltage and large-current carrying cables such as
power supply cables. Keep control cables and input/output cables at least 200 mm away from high-voltage and
large-current carrying cables. Otherwise, malfunction may occur due to noise.
 When using the V9 series in an environment where a source of high-frequency noise is present, it is
recommended that the FG shielded cable (communication cable) be grounded at each end. However, when
communication is unstable, select between grounding one or both ends, as permitted by the usage
environment.
 Be sure to plug connectors and sockets of the V9 series in the correct orientation. Failure to do so may lead to
damage or malfunction.
 If a LAN cable is inserted into the MJ1 or MJ2 connector, the device on the other end may be damaged. Check
the connector names on the unit and insert cables into the correct connectors.
 Do not use thinners for cleaning because it may discolor the V9 series surface. Use commercially available
alcohol.
 If a data receive error occurs when the V9 series unit and a counterpart unit (PLC, temperature controller, etc.)
are started at the same time, read the manual of the counterpart unit to correctly resolve the error.
 Avoid discharging static electricity on the mounting panel of the V9 series. Static charge can damage the unit
and cause malfunctions. Discharging static electricity on the mounting panel may cause malfunction to occur
due to noise.
 Avoid prolonged display of any fixed pattern. Due to the characteristic of liquid crystal displays, an afterimage
may occur. If prolonged display of a fixed pattern is expected, use the backlight’s auto OFF function.
 The V9 series is identified as a class-A product in industrial environments. In the case of use in a domestic
environment, the unit is likely to cause electromagnetic interference. Preventive measures should thereby be
taken appropriately.

[Notes on the LCD]

Note that the following conditions may occur under normal circumstances.
 The response time, brightness, and colors of the V9 series may be affected by the ambient temperature.
 Tiny spots (dark or luminescent) may appear on the display due to the characteristics of liquid crystal.
 There are variations in brightness and color between units.
 Contents

Chapter 1 Outline
1.1 Type of V Series Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 Screen Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.3 Multi-overlap Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.4 Switch Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
1.5 Function Switch Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
1.6 Initial Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Macro Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
[General] tab window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

1.7 Global Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

Macro Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
[General] tab window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Macro Execution Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Supplemental Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7

1.8 Event Timer Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

Macro Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
[Event Timer Macro] tab window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Supplemental Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

1.9 Interval Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Setting Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
[Macro Edit] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
[Detail] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Setting Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

1.10 Macro Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
[Macro Edit] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
[Detail] window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16

1.11 Alarm Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

1.12 Scheduler Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
1.13 Notes on Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Chapter 2 Edit
2.1 Macro Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.1.1 Start and Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Overlap library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Function switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Macro block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Macro mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Alarm macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Scheduler macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Quit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.1.2 Screen Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
[File] menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
[Edit]/right-click menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
[View] menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Comment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Macro Editing Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.1.3 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
1: Command Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
New registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Device memory change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Command change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
2: Direct Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
New registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Memory change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Command change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
3: Macro Editing Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
New registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Device memory change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
4: Text Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Text editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2.1.4 Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

2.2 Available Device Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

2.2.1 Device Memory Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
2.2.2 Indirect Device Memory Designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Internal Device Memory, PLC (1 - 8) Device Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
 2.3 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used) . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.3.1 Applicable Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
2.3.2 Recipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Setting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Setting details. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
V8-compatible settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
CSV File Name and Storage Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Total Number of CSV Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Data in CSV File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
2.3.3 Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Alarm Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Setting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Setting details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Logging Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Setting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Setting details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
CSV File Name and Storage Target . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
For “SMPL_CSV” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
For “SMPLCSV_BAK/SMPLCSV_BAK2” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Chapter 3 Command
3.1 Macro Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Chapter 4 Details of Macro Commands

4.1 Guide to Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 Arithmetical Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
ADD(+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
SUB(-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
MUL(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
DIV(/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
MOD(%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9

4.3 Logical Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10

AND(&) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
OR(|) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
XOR(^) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
SHL(<<) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
SHR(>>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14

4.4 Statistic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15

MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
MIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
AVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
SUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18

4.5 Mathematics/trigonometric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19

EXP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
EXPT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
LN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
SQRT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
NEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
 SIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26
COS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
TAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
ASIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
ACOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
ATAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
DEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
RAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

4.6 Bit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34

BSET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
BCLR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
BINV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

4.7 Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37

BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
CWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
CVP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
CVPFMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
CVB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
CVBFMT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
SWAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
CHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
STRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46
CVFD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47
CVDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
CLND_TO_GRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
GRE_TO_CLND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53
FORMAT_DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55
FORMAT_STR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59

4.8 Transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63

MOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63
BMOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
CVMOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66
CVSMOV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69
FILL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71

4.9 Comparison. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72

CMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72
TST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-74
IF ELSE ENDIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75

4.10 Macro Operation Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77

CALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77
JMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-79
LABEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-80
FOR/NEXT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81
RET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-83
SWRET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-84
EN_INT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-85

4.11 FROM Backup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86

FROM_WR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86
FROM_RD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-87
4.12 PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
PLC_CLND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-88
PLC_CTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-90
TBL_READ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-92
TBL_WRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-93

4.13 Ethernet. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94

SEND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94
EREAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95
EWRITE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-96

4.14 Storage (Recipe) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97

LD_RECIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-97
LD_RECIPE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-100
LD_RECIPESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102
LD_RECIPESEL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-105
SV_RECIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109
SV_RECIPE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-111
SV_RECIPESEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113
SV_RECIPESEL2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-116
SET_RECIPEFOLDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-118
RD_RECIPE_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-120
RD_RECIPE_LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-122
RD_RECIPE_COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-124
WR_RECIPE_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126
WR_RECIPE_LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128
WR_RECIPE_COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-130
GET_RECIPE_FILEINFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132

4.15 Storage (Sampling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134

SMPL_BAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134
SMPL_CSV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-136
SMPL_CSV2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-138
SMPL_SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140
SMPLCSV_BAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-141
SMPLCSV_BAK2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144

4.16 Storage (Others) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146

HDCOPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-146
HDCOPY2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-147
HDCOPY3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-148
SET_DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149
COPY_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150
MOVE_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-152
READ_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-154
WRITE_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156

4.17 Real No. Arithmetical Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158

F_ADD(+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-158
F_SUB(-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-159
F_MUL(X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-160
F_DIV(/) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-161

4.18 Real No. Statistics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162

F_SUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-162
F_AVG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-163
F_MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-164
F_MIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-165
4.19 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-166
;(Comment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-166
BRIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-167
GET_MSGBLK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-168
PLC_ULR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-169
RECONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-171
RECONNECT_EX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-172
SAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-173
SEARCH_FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-176
ADJ_VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-177
SAVE_VOLUME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-178
TREND REFRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-179
SYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-180
1
1.1
Outline

Type of V Series Macros

1.2 Screen Macro
1.3 Multi-overlap Macro
1.4 Switch Macro
1.5 Function Switch Macro
1.6 Initial Macro
1.7 Global Macro
1.8 Event Timer Macro
1.9 Interval Timer
1.10 Macro Mode
1.11 Alarm Macro
1.12 Scheduler Macro
1.13 Notes on Macros
 Type of V Series Macros

1.1 Type of V Series Macros 1

Macros, created with V-series-specific commands, are used to process user programs.
Macro creation is made simple with easy-to-use commands.
Macros are executable for the following occasions:

• Screen
- OPEN macro: Executes once when the screen is opened.
- CLOSE macro: Executes once when the screen is switched.
- CYCLE macro: Executes repeatedly while the screen is open.

• Multi-overlap
- OPEN macro: Executes once when the multi-overlap is opened.
- CLOSE macro: Executes once when the multi-overlap is closed.
* OPEN and CLOSE macros cannot be used for call-overlaps.

• Switch
- ON macro: Executes once when the switch is pressed.
- OFF macro: Executes once when the switch is released.

• Function switch
- ON macro: Executes once when the function switch is pressed.
- OFF macro: Executes once when the function switch is released.

• Initial macro
The specified macro block executes once before the V series starts communicating with
the PLC. (Refer to page 1-6.)

• Global macro
The specified macro block is executed once when the control device memory is changed
from 0 to 1 (leading edge). (Refer to page 1-7.)

• Event timer macro

The specified macro block executes at regular intervals, regardless of which screen is
currently displayed. (Refer to page 1-8.)

• Interval timer
While a screen equipped with the interval timer is displayed, the timer starts as preset.
Each time the preset time has elapsed, the specified macro block is executed. (Refer to
page 1-9.)

• Macro mode
While a screen equipped with macro mode is displayed, macros are executed according to
the status at the specified device memory addresses. (Refer to page 1-15.)
- ON macro: Executes when the bit at the specified device memory address
changes from 0  1 (leading edge).
- OFF macro: Executes when the bit at the specified device memory address
changes from 1  0 (falling edge).
• Alarm macro
When a macro is set in the [Alarm Server] window, it is executed according to a change in
the status of the device memory for errors. (Refer to page 1-17.)
- Occurrence macro: To be executed at the time of alarm occurrence
- Resetting macro: To be executed at the time of alarm reset

• Scheduler macro
When a macro is set in the [Scheduler] window, it is executed at the timing specified for
[Trigger]. (Refer to page 1-18.)

1-1
Screen Macro

1.2 Screen Macro

This macro is registered for screens.
Registered commands are executed at the following timings:

• OPEN macro
This macro is executed once when a screen is opened.
Select [Screen Setting]  [Open Macro] and register the command to be executed.

• CLOSE macro
This macro is executed once when a screen is closed.
Select [Screen Setting]  [Close Macro] and register the command to be executed.

• CYCLE macro
This macro is executed repeatedly while the screen is open.
Select [Screen Setting]  [Close Macro] and register the command to be executed.

1-2
 Multi-overlap Macro

1.3 Multi-overlap Macro 1

This macro is registered for overlap displays.
Registered commands are executed at the following timings:

• OPEN macro
This macro is executed once when a multi-overlap display is opened.
Select [Screen Setting]  [Open Macro] in the overlap library window and register the
command to be executed.

• CLOSE macro
This macro is executed once when a multi-overlap display is closed.
Select [Screen Setting]  [Close Macro] in the overlap library window and register the
command to be executed.

1-3
Switch Macro

1.4 Switch Macro

This macro is registered for switches.

• ON macro
This macro is executed once when a switch is pressed.
Set the command in the [Macro] window of the switch.

- Editing with [Setting Method: Use switch macros] selected

Macro commands are registered for switches.

- Editing with [Setting Method: Specify the macro block number] selected
Register macro commands in a macro block, and select a number of the macro block to
execute.

• OFF macro
This macro is executed once when a switch is released.
Set the command in the [Macro] window of the switch.

- Editing with [Setting Method: Use switch macros] selected

Macro commands are registered for switches.

- Editing with [Setting Method: Specify the macro block number] selected
Register macro commands in a macro block, and select a number of the macro block to
execute.

1-4
 Function Switch Macro

1.5 Function Switch Macro 1

This macro is registered for function switches.

• ON macro
This macro is executed once when a switch is pressed.
Set the command in the [Local Function Switch Setting] window.

• OFF macro
This macro is executed once when a switch is released.
Set the command in the [Local Function Switch Setting] window.

1-5
Initial Macro

1.6 Initial Macro

An initial macro is executed once before the V series starts communicating with an external
device.
Select [System Setting]  [Macro Setting] to make settings.
Register the command in [Macro Block].
Select [Home]  [Registration Item]  [Macro Block] to register a macro block.
For more information, refer to page 2-3.

Macro Setting

[General] tab window

Initial Macro Check this box to use an initial macro.

Specify the macro block number to be executed before the V series
starts communicating with the PLC.
0 - 1023: Macro block number

1-6
 Global Macro

1.7 Global Macro 1

A global macro is executed when the bit is set (ON), regardless of the screen being displayed.
Select [System Setting]  [Macro Setting] to make settings.
Register the command in [Macro Block].
Select [Home]  [Registration Item]  [Macro Block] to register a macro block.
For more information, refer to page 2-3.

Macro Setting

[General] tab window

Global Macro Check this box to use a global macro.

Macro Block Specify the macro block number to be executed.
It can also be specified by specifying a device memory address.
Control Device Specify a macro start bit.
The macro is executed when the specified bit changes from 0  1
(leading edge).
Information Output This reflects the status of the control device memory.
Device

Macro Execution Steps

1. Specify the number of the macro block for which commands to be executed are
registered.
2. The control device memory is set ([0  1] leading edge).

Macro execution

The information output device memory is automatically set ([0  1]).

3. The control device memory is reset ([1  0] falling edge).

Supplemental Remarks

• By using the information output device memory, you can check the timing to reset (OFF)
the control device memory.

1-7
Event Timer Macro

1.8 Event Timer Macro

An event timer macro is executed at regular intervals, regardless of the screen being
displayed.
Select [System Setting]  [Macro Setting]  [Event Timer Macro] to make settings.
Register the command in [Macro Block].
Select [Home]  [Registration Item]  [Macro Block] to register a macro block.
For more information, refer to page 2-3.

Macro Setting

[Event Timer Macro] tab window

Event Timer 0-7

A maximum of eight event timer macro blocks can be set.
Cycle Time 0 - 3600 (sec)
Specify a cycle time for the timer. The specified macro block is
executed each time the specified time has elapsed.
Macro No. 0 - 1023
Specify the macro block number to be executed.

Supplemental Remarks

1. When the timers for multiple event timer macros are up at the same time:
Event timer macro blocks are executed in ascending numeric order of [Event Timer]. After
a macro block has been processed, execution proceeds to the next macro block.

Event timer macro No. 0

Event timer macro No. 1

CYCLE macro

2. When accessing the same external device memory address in some event timer macros:
The processing ability will be improved if you set the event timer macro No. 0 that reads
the external device memory into the internal device memory and make other event timer
macros refer to this internal device memory.
In order to improve the overall processing ability, reduce the number of times that the
external device memory is accessed.

1-8
 Interval Timer

1.9 Interval Timer 1

The interval timer can be set for screens and multi-overlap displays.
Select [Screen Setting]  [Interval Timer] to make settings.
The interval timer has the following three functions.
Register the command in [Macro Block] for all cases.

• The specified macro is executed at intervals specified for [Repeat Interval] from when the
screen is opened.
The screen is
opened. Repetition interval
Time

Macro
Macro execution

• The specified macro is executed at intervals specified for [Repeat Interval] from when an
arbitrary bit is set (ON). (This function is valid only while the bit is ON.)

An arbitrary device memory bit is ON.

Device
memory Repetition interval
Time

Macro
Macro execution

• The specified macro is executed once after the time specified for [Repeat Interval] has
elapsed since the screen was opened or an arbitrary bit was set (ON).
The screen is
opened. Repetition interval
Time

Macro
Macro execution

An arbitrary device memory bit is ON.

Device
memory Repetition interval
Time

Macro
Macro execution

1-9
Interval Timer

Setting Dialog

[Macro Edit] window

Repeat Interval *1 0 - 255 ( 100 msec)

Specify a repetition interval to execute the macro. The macro is executed at
the specified intervals. When “0” is specified, the macro is executed every
cycle.
The timing to start the timer depends on the setting for [Use the start device].
Stop after macro Check this box to execute the macro only once.
execution When the specified time has elapsed and the macro has been executed, the
timer stops.
Use the start device Check this box when specifying the start device memory address.
• Unchecked
The timer starts when
the screen is opened. Repetition interval

Time

Macro
Macro block execution

• Checked
While the bit is “1” (ON): The macro is executed at intervals specified
for [Repeat Interval].
While the bit is “0” (OFF): The macro is not executed.
Timer start
Start device memory
OFF ON
Repetition
interval
Time

Macro
Macro block execution

Execution Macro Specify the macro block number to be executed at intervals specified for
[Repeat Interval].

1-10
 Interval Timer

ON Macro Specify the macro block number to be executed once when the timer starts.
• [Use the start device] unchecked:
1
When the screen is opened, the timer starts and the ON macro is
executed once.
The timer starts when
the screen is opened. Repetition interval

Time

Macro
Macro block execution

Execution of ON macro block Different macro block

• [Use the start device] checked:

The ON macro block is executed once when the start device memory bit
is set to “1”.

Timer start
Start device memory
OFF ON
Repetition interval

Time

Macro
Macro block execution
Different macro block
Execution of ON macro block

OFF Macro This option is enabled, provided that [Use the start device] is checked.
Specify the macro block number to be executed once when the start device
memory bit is reset (1  0).

Timer start
Start device memory
OFF ON

Repetition interval

Time

Macro
Macro block execution

Execution of ON macro block Execution of OFF

macro block
Different macro block

This option is useful for clearing the internal device memory that is used for a
macro.
Edit This button is used to open a macro block.
Preview This area displays the contents of macros registered in the selected macro
block number.

*1 The actual repetition interval may fluctuate according to the contents of the screen.

1-11
Interval Timer

[Detail] window

Process Cycle Specify the cycle for the V series to read the PLC when they are
communicating.
For more information, refer to the V9 Series Reference Manual.
ID Specify an ID.

1-12
 Interval Timer

Setting Example 1
Graphic movement on the screen
When the switch is pressed, a graphic from the graphic library is displayed. At the same
time, the graphic placed on the left of the screen starts to move to the right.
Pressing the switch next clears the graphic. Pressing the switch again displays the graphic
in the same position where it was displayed last. The graphic starts to move to the right.

(1) Graphic
(4) Graphic library

(3) Switch

(2) Interval timer

$u100-00 = ON
OFF
Start device memory
The graphic is displayed on the screen.

$u100-00 = ON
Graphic relay

Macro
(5) Macro block No. 1 = Executed in every cycle
Change the X parameter of the graphic.

Screen Edit

(1) Graphic (2) Interval timer

([Method: Device (Bit Designation)])
Number of Bits to Monitor: 1 Repeat Interval: 0
Device Designation: $u100-00 Stop after macro execution
Type: 1-Graphic Use the start device: $u100-00
Mode: XOR Execution Macro: Macro block No.: 1
Start Graphic: GNo. 0 No. 0 ON Macro: Macro block No.
Valid parameters No.: 1 OFF Macro: Macro block No.

(3) Switch
Device to Output: $u100-00
Output Action: Alternate
Lamp Device: $u100-00

1-13
Interval Timer

Graphic Library Edit (4)

Example: GNo. 0 & No. 0
Place the following graphic on the screen, and specify the X parameter.

Graphic library 0:0

Pattern No. 0

<Parameter setting>
[Action: Animation]
[Start X: Increment +1]
(Incremental coordinate +1)

Macro Block Edit (5)

Example: Macro block No. 1
0 $u00101 = $u00101 + 1 (W)
1 IF ($u00101 = 640) LB00 (W)
2 RET
3 LB00:
4 $u00101 = 0 (W)

Macro to change the X parameter of the graphic start point

While the count on the X axis is increasing up to 640 (0  1  ...  640  0  1 
...  640), the graphic moves from the left to the right.

Transfer the above screen program to the V series for checking.

1-14
 Macro Mode

1.10 Macro Mode 1

Select [Screen Setting]  [Macro] to make settings.
The interval timer can be set for screens and multi-overlap displays.
Macro mode is used to execute an ON macro when the corresponding bit changes from 0  1
(leading edge) and an OFF macro when the corresponding bit changes from 1  0 (falling
edge).
However, when the screen (multi-overlap) is opened, they are executed upon level
recognition.
(Refer to [Execute an OFF macro at startup].)
Set the command in the [Macro Edit] window of the macro mode.
A maximum of 32 ON/OFF macros each can be set using the consecutive bits.

Setting

[Macro Edit] window

Device Designation Specify the device memory address that triggers the macro.
Number of Relays 1 - 32
Specify the number of bits for triggering macros.
The number specified here is common to both the ON macro
and OFF macro.

Example: “10” specified for [Number of Relays]

- ON Macro: 10 maximum
- OFF Macro: 10 maximum
In this case, 10 bits must be allocated for [Device Designation].
Execute an OFF Set the operation to be performed when a screen or multi-overlap for
macro at startup which a macro mode is set is opened.
• Checked
While the bit specified for [Device Designation] is ON, the ON
macro is executed; while it is OFF, the OFF macro is executed.
• Unchecked
The ON macro is executed while the bit specified for [Device
Designation] is ON.
While the bit is OFF, nothing is executed.
Macro to Edit As many ON/OFF macros as the number for [Number of Relays] can
be set.

1-15
Macro Mode

Edit The macro editor window corresponding to the selected relay

number is opened.
Delete The macro of the selected relay number is deleted.
Cut The macro of the selected relay number is cut (copied and deleted).
Copy The macro of the selected relay number is copied.
Paste The copied macro is pasted to the selected relay number.
Preview The macro of the selected relay number is shown.

[Detail] window

Process Cycle Specify the cycle for the V series to read data in the PLC when they
are communicating.
For more information, refer to the V9 Series Reference Manual.
ID Specify an ID.

1-16
 Alarm Macro

1.11 Alarm Macro 1

An alarm macro can be set when the alarm server is used.
Select [Alarm Device]  [Operation Setting] to set macro commands.
When an alarm occurs, the occurrence macro is executed once. When it is reset, the resetting
macro is executed once.
Select [Alarm Server]  [Alarm Device]  [Operation Setting]  [Macro], and set commands
to be executed.

- Editing with [Setting: Use Alarm macros] selected

Register macro commands directly in the [Operation Setting] window.

- Editing with [Setting: Specify the macro block number] selected

Register macro commands in a macro block, and select a number of the macro block to
execute.

1-17
Scheduler Macro

1.12 Scheduler Macro

A scheduler macro is executed by using the scheduler function.
Select [System Setting]  [Scheduler] to set macro commands.
The registered macro is executed once at the timing specified for [Trigger] in the [Scheduler]
window.
Select [Action]  [Macro], and set commands to be executed.

- Editing with [Setting: Use Scheduler macros] selected

Register macro commands directly in the [Action] tab window.

- Editing with [Setting: Specify the macro block number] selected

Register macro commands in a macro block, and select a number of the macro block to
execute.

1-18
 Notes on Macros

1.13 Notes on Macros 1

• A maximum of 1,024 lines (instructions) can be set for one macro.
• The maximum of executable lines in macros is 160,000.
If the maximum permissible number is exceeded by, for instance the repetition of the same
macro with the use of a loop macro, macro execution is forcibly terminated.
With the V9 series, if the maximum number of executions is exceeded “-1 (DEC)” is stored
at $s1059.
• A maximum of 4096 words of data can be transferred per command. When creating
macros, be careful not to exceed the maximum.
• When an external device memory is used with multiple MOV commands, the external
memory is accessed each time so the processing speed is slowed down.
Example:
Line No. 0 PLC1 [D00200] = $u00200 (W)
Line No. 1 PLC1 [D00201] = $u00201 (W)
Line No. 2 PLC1 [D00202] = $u00202 (W)
Line No. 3 PLC1 [D00203] = $u00203 (W)
Line No. 4 PLC1 [D00204] = $u00204 (W)

In the above example, the V series goes and writes data to D200 as commanded in
line No. 0, then goes and writes data to D201 as commanded in line No. 1, and so on.
Communications that frequently occur will result in a prolonged processing time.
To shorten the communications time, give a BMOV command as shown below. The
contents of the macro using BMOV are the same as the above macro consisting of five
lines, but the data writing takes place only once.

Line No. 0 PLC1 [D00200] = $u00200 C:5 (BMOV) (W)

The processing speed is increased and the number of macro commands is reduced.
As described above, macros can be simplified when you plan to make their commands
more efficient to use.

1-19
Notes on Macros

Please use this page freely.

1-20
2
2.1
Edit

Macro Editor
2.1.1 Start and Quit
2.1.2 Screen Composition
2.1.3 Edit
2.1.4 Error
2.2 Available Device Memory
2.2.1 Device Memory Types
2.2.2 Indirect Device Memory Designation
2.3 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro
Used)
2.3.1 Applicable Macros
2.3.2 Recipe
2.3.3 Sampling
 Macro Editor

2.1 Macro Editor

This section describes the usage of the macro editor.

2.1.1 Start and Quit 2

Start

How to start the macro editor varies depending on the location where a macro command is
registered.

Screen
• OPEN macro
[Screen Setting]  [Open Macro]
• CLOSE macro
[Screen Setting]  [Close Macro]
• CYCLE macro
[Screen Setting]  [Cycle Macro]

Overlap library
Select [Home]  [Registration Item]  [Overlap Library] to show the overlap display where a
macro is to be registered.

• OPEN macro
[Screen Setting]  [Open Macro]
• CLOSE macro
[Screen Setting]  [Close Macro]

2-1
Macro Editor

Switch
• ON macro
[Macro]  [Macro to Edit: ON Macro]  [Edit]
• OFF macro
[Macro]  [Macro to Edit: OFF Macro]  [Edit]

Function switch
• ON macro
[Function Switch Setting]  [ON Macro]  [Edit]
• OFF macro
[Function Switch Setting]  [OFF Macro]  [Edit]

2-2
 Macro Editor

Macro block
[Home]  [Registration Item]  [Macro Block]
Specify the number of the macro block where macro commands are to be registered, and click
[OK].

Macro mode
[Screen Setting]  [Macro]

• ON macro
[Macro Edit]  [ON Macro]  [Edit]

• OFF macro
[Macro Edit]  [OFF Macro]  [Edit]

2-3
Macro Editor

Alarm macro
[Alarm Server]  [Alarm Device]  [Operation Setting]  [Macro]

• Occurrence macro
[Macro to Edit: Occurrence operation]  [Setting: Use Alarm macros]  [Edit]
• Resetting macro:
[Macro to Edit: Cancellation operation]  [Setting: Specify the macro block number]
 [Edit]

Scheduler macro
[Scheduler]  [Action]  [Macro]

[Setting: Use Scheduler macros]  [Edit]

2-4
 Macro Editor

Quit

1. Select [File]  [Close], or click the close button in the upper right corner of the window.

2. When no error is detected, the macro editor ends normally. If detected, the following
message appears.
Select a countermeasure for the error, and quit the macro editor.

Example: When quitting by commenting out the error line

When the macro editor is opened

again, the error line is changed to a
comment in red with “;(ERR)”
appended to the beginning of the line.

2-5
Macro Editor

2.1.2 Screen Composition

The macro editor window is configured as follows:

Menu bar
Refer to page 2-6.
Toolbar
Refer to page 2-9.
Line No.
Edit sheet
Refer to page 2-10.

Error display
Refer to page 2-18.

Macro editing support

Refer to page 2-9.

Menus

[File] menu

Close Quits the macro editor.

Import Reads text files.
Export Saves the macro currently being edited to a text file.
Print Preview Displays the printout image of the macro being edited.
Print Current Window Prints the macro currently being edited.

2-6
 Macro Editor

[Edit]/right-click menu

Undo Returns you to the previous state by canceling the effect of the most
recently executed command.
Redo Returns you to the state before [Undo] is executed.
Cut Cuts the selected area and saves it to the clipboard.
Copy Copies the selected area and saves it to the clipboard.
Paste Pastes the data from the clipboard.
Delete Deletes the selected area.
Select All Selects all macros currently being edited.
Delete All Deletes all macros currently being edited.
Find Searches for characters in the macro currently being edited.
Replace Searches for characters in the macro currently being edited and
replaces them.
Jump to Next Line Jumps to the specified line.
Set Comment Converts the line selected in the macro editor window to a comment
(with “;” as the first character).
Reset Comment Resets the comment conversion selected in the macro editor
window (deletes the first character “;” from the comment).
Edit Comment Allows you to edit comments on macro blocks during macro block
editing.

2-7
Macro Editor

[View] menu

Tool Bar Selects whether to show/hide the toolbar.

Support Dialog Selects whether to show/hide the [Macro Editing Support] dialog.
For more information on the dialog, refer to page 2-9.
Jump Opens the macro editor window for the number specified in [Macro
Block].
Previous Page Opens the previous page.
Next Page Opens the next page.
Skip to Non- Skips the non-registered screens at the time of screen change.
registered Screen
Character Size Allows you to select the size of characters to be displayed in the
macro editor.
Display Language Allows you to select the language to be displayed in the macro
editor.
Memory Setting Allows you to select the position where the memory setting pull-
Menu down menu appears in the macro editor.
(Upside Display,
Downside Display, Example: [Downside Display] selected
Hide)

Placing the cursor at a

memory address brings up this
underneath the address.

2-8
 Macro Editor

Toolbar

Edit
Refer to “Menus” (page 2-6).

Comment List
2

Comment List Jumps to the selected comment line.

Macro Editing Support

To go to this dialog, select [Support Dialog] from the [View] menu.

Category
Explanation
Command

Setting items

Category Macro category list

Command The list of commands contained in the selected category
Setting items Setting items required for the selected command
Inserted Comment Comments can be registered together with commands.
UP/DW Moves the selected line.
Overwrite Overwrites the selected line with the contents of [Preview].
Insert Inserts the contents of [Preview] into the position above the
selected line.
Explanation Explains the command selected from the list.
Preview Displays the preview of macro editing.

2-9
Macro Editor

2.1.3 Edit

You can utilize the macro editor in several editing manners. Choose a desired one.

1: Command Entry
Editing is performed with the command list. This method is useful when you know the
names of particular commands. (Refer to page 2-10.)
2: Direct Entry
Editing is performed by entering text through the keyboard of your computer. (Refer to
page 2-12.)
3: Macro Editing Support
Editing is performed in the dialog that provides the explanation of individual commands.
This method is best suited to beginners. (Refer to page 2-14.)
4: Text Entry
Editing is performed with a text editor (commercially available). Macro programming is
enabled even in an environment without the editor. (Refer to page 2-16.)

1: Command Entry

New registration
1. Select a line using the [UP] / [DW] button.
2. Enter a command. The command list appears.

Command list

3. Choose the desired command from the list and double-click it.
Alternatively, choose the desired command using the [] / [] key on the keyboard and
press the Enter key.

4. The [Device Setting] dialog appears. Make necessary settings, such as the address and
data length, in the dialog, and click the [Finish] or [] button.

2-10
 Macro Editor

5. The line has been registered. To proceed with the next line registration, go back to step 1.

Device memory change

Device memory addresses (corresponding to [F0] / [F1] / [F2] / [F3]) are colored green. Follow
the steps below when you wish to change any addresses:

• Select the desired memory address in green with the cursor. The device memory setting
menu is displayed. Change the address as necessary.

Placing the cursor at any device

memory address brings this up.

• Select the desired device memory address in green with the cursor, and type an address
change through your computer keyboard.

Command change
Choose the line you wish to change. Delete the line and register a new line.

2-11
Macro Editor

2: Direct Entry

New registration
1. Select a line using the [UP] / [DW] button.
2. Enter mnemonic codes through the keyboard.
Example: MOV command
PLC1 [D200] = $u100 (W)
* For designating memory, refer to page 2-19.

The memory setting menu may appear

halfway through the entry process.
Use as necessary.

3. Press the Enter key to go to the next line. To proceed with the next line registration, go
back to step 1.

2-12
 Macro Editor

Memory change
Memory addresses (corresponding to [F0] / [F1] / [F2] / [F3]) are colored green. Follow the
steps below when you wish to change any memory addresses:

• Select the desired memory address in green with the cursor. The memory setting menu is
displayed. Change the address as necessary. 2

Placing the cursor at any

memory address brings this up.

• Select the desired memory address in green with the cursor, and type an address change
through the keyboard.

Command change
Choose the line you wish to change. Delete the line and register a new line.

2-13
Macro Editor

3: Macro Editing Support

New registration
1. Select a line using the [UP] / [DW] button.
2. Select the desired command from the pull-down menu and the macro list.

Select a
command.

3. The setting items required for the selected command are displayed. Specify the address,
data length, etc.

Explanation

Setting items

4. The settings made are displayed under [Preview].

5. If you wish to make a comment, enter it in the comment entry box.

6. To overwrite the selected line, press the [Overwrite] button. To insert a line into the position
above the selected line, press the [Insert] button.
7. The line has been registered. To proceed with the next line registration, go back to step 1.

2-14
 Macro Editor

Device memory change

1. Select the line to be modified. The command and the values specified for the line are
displayed in the [Macro Editing Support] dialog.

2
The dialog shows
the command and
the values for the
selected line.

2. Change the device memory addresses as desired and click the [Overwrite] button.
Clicking the [Insert] button inserts the changed setting into the position above the selected
line.

2-15
Macro Editor

4: Text Entry

The macro editor is capable of importing and exporting text files. Even if the editor is not
installed on your computer, macros can be created with commercially available software.

Export
1. From the [File] menu, select [Export]. The [Save As] dialog is displayed.

2. Enter a file name and click [Save]. A text file is created under the name.

Text editing
Editing on Notepad
1. Open the text file on Notepad.

2. Select a line using the [UP] / [DW] button.

3. Enter mnemonic codes through the keyboard.
Example: Addition command
$u1000 = $u200 + $u300 (W)
* For designating memory, refer to page 2-19.

4. Save the file.

2-16
 Macro Editor

Import
1. Open the edit sheet, to which a text file will be imported.
2. From the [File] menu, select [Import]. The [Open] dialog is displayed.

3. Select the desired file and click [Open]. The text file is imported.

2-17
Macro Editor

2.1.4 Error

1. If the registered lines of a macro have any errors, error messages are displayed.

Error display

2. Double-clicking an error message selects the corresponding line.

Selected

3. Correct the error as needed in the message. Once finished, the message disappears.

Since the PLCn device memory is not

enabled for [F0], it is changed to the
internal device memory.
The error message disappears.

2-18
 Available Device Memory

2.2 Available Device Memory

2.2.1 Device Memory Types

The following device memory types can be used with macros:

2
Device Memory Setting Range Remarks
$u $u00000 - $u32767
$s $s0000 - $s2047
$L Depends on the setting *1
$LD Depends on the setting *1
$T $T0000 - $T1023
Internal device
memory $P n : *2 $Pn:000 - $Pn:511
$M $M0000 - $M2047
$MC $MC0000 - $MC2047
$C $C0000 - $C4095
Indirect device memory $u/$T/$M only
For more information, refer to page 2-20.
designation usable
[File No.: Record No.]
Memory card [0:0] #0000 - [15:4094] #4095
#address
PLC n [xxxx] *2*3 (Example) PLC1 [D100] 1:1 communication
PLCn device
memory PLCn [Port number:
(Example) PLC1 [1:D100] 1:n communication
xxxx] *2*3
WORD 0U - 65535U Add “U” to the
DEC extreme right
DWORD 0U - 4294967295U position.
WORD -32768 - 32767
DEC-
DWORD 2147483648 - 2147483647
WORD 0o - 177777o Add “o” to the
extreme right
Constant OCT
DWORD 0o - 37777777777o position.
(lower-case “o”)
WORD 0000H - FFFFH Add “H” to the
HEX extreme right
DWORD 00000000H - FFFFFFFFH position.
3.402823E+38 - 1.401298E-45
FLOAT DWORD 0
1.401298E-45 - 3.402823E+38

*1 The available range varies depending on the settings set on the [SRAM/Clock Setting]
dialog.
*2 For “n”, set the number of the connected device (1 to 8).
*3 The designation of [xxxx] varies depending on the type of the connected device. For
more information, refer to the available device memory list in the V9 Series Connection
Manual.

2-19
Available Device Memory

2.2.2 Indirect Device Memory Designation

Each device memory address can be indirectly designated.

The designation procedure varies depending on the device memory type and addresses.

Internal Device Memory, PLC (1 - 8) Device Memory

• Addresses 0 - 65535: • Addresses 65536 and above:

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0 15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0
n+0 Model Device memory type n+0 Model Device memory type
n+1 Device memory No. (address) n+1 Device memory No. (address) lower-order
n+2 Expansion code Bit designation n+2 Device memory No. (address) higher-order
n+3 00 Station number n+3 Expansion code Bit designation
n+4 00 Station number

- Model, device memory type (hexadecimal)

Device memory Model Device memory type

$u 00
00
$s 01
0 - 65535 00
$L 02
65536 - 80
0 - 65535 00
Internal device $LD 03
65536 - 80
memory
$T 00 04
$Pn*1 00 05
$M 00 06
$MC 00 07
$C 00 08

PLC1 device 0 - 65535 01/11*2

memory 65536 - 81/91*2

PLC2 device 0 - 65535 03/12*2

memory 65536 - 83/92*2

PLC3 device 0 - 65535 13

memory 65536 - 93

PLC4 device 0 - 65535 14 The device memory type depends on

memory 65536 - 94 the device memory used. Refer to the
V9 Series Connection Manual or the
PLC5 device 0 - 65535 15 PLC Connection Manual and set the
memory 65536 - 95 type number of the device memory.

PLC6 device 0 - 65535 16

memory 65536 - 96

PLC7 device 0 - 65535 17

memory 65536 - 97

PLC8 device 0 - 65535 18

memory 65536 - 98

*1 “n” treated as an expansion code

*2 The memory will work when specified with either model.

2-20
 Available Device Memory

- Expansion code
An expansion code should be designated, depending on the type of memory in use.
For more information, refer to the description of indirect device memory designation
relevant to the target device memory type in the V9 Series Connection Manual.

Ex.: Mitsubishi Electric SPU device memory

Unit No. 0: 00
2
Unit No. 1: 01

- Station number
1 : 1 or multi-link: Not used
1 : n (multi-drop): Set the station number of the connected device.

Memory card

15 MSB 8 7 LSB 0
n+0 02H File No.
n+1 Word address in the record
n+2 Record No.

- File number, word address in the record, record number

Refer to the memory card map in the V9 Series Reference Manual.

Example

• When accessing a word in the PLCn memory, “0” is specified for the “n + 2” word even in
the case of device memory that does not use an expansion code.
Ex.: Accessing D165 in a Mitsubishi PLC (PLC1)
(Macro)
$u100 = 0100H (W) Model: 01 (PLC1 memory) Memory type: 00
$u101 = 0165 (W) Device memory No.: 165
$u102 = 0000 (W) Expansion code: None
$u200 = *$u100 (W)
(Result of execution)
Data at D165 is transferred to $u200.

• When accessing the bit-writable device memory, such as the Mitsubishi M Relay, the
following setting is necessary.

Device memory number = M (address)/16

Ex.: Accessing M20

(Macro)
$u100 = 0106H (W) Model: 01 (PLC1 device memory) Device memory type: 06
$u101 = 0001H (W) Device memory No. = 20 16 = 1...4
$u102 = 0004H (W) Expansion code: None Bit designation: 4
*$u100 (ON)
(Result of execution)
The bit of M20 is set (ON).

2-21
CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

2.3 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

Format settings are required for handling CSV files. Register data formats of CSV files in
[Format Setting]. MONITOUCH will read/write the CSV files in accordance with these format
settings.

2.3.1 Applicable Macros

Function Macro CSV File Name Setting Location Refer to:

LD_RECIPE page 4-97
LD_RECIPE2 page 4-100
LD_RECIPESEL page 4-102
RECxxxx.CSV
LD_RECIPESEL2 page 4-105
SV_RECIPE 0000 - 9999 page 4-109
(Designation of a number)
SV_RECIPE2 page 4-111
SV_RECIPESEL page 4-113
Recipe [Recipe]  [File Format]
SV_RECIPESEL2 page 4-116
RD_RECIPE_FILE page 4-120
xxxxxxxx.CSV
RD_RECIPE_LINE page 4-122
RD_RECIPE_COLUMN 8 one-byte upper-case page 4-124
alphanumeric characters
WR_RECIPE_FILE page 4-126
or less
WR_RECIPE_LINE (Designation of a name) page 4-128
WR_RECIPE_COLUMN page 4-130
xxxxxxxx.CSV
SMPL_CSV Designation of a file name page 4-136
by the editor

xxxxxxxx.CSV
SMPL_CSV2 Designation of a file name page 4-138
by the device memory
• Alarm server
xxxxxxxx_ [Alarm Block]  [Format
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.CSV Setting]
Sampling Designation of a file name by
SMPLCSV_BAK the editor page 4-141
After _: Output time in year, • Logging Server
month, day, hour, [Logging Block] 
minute, and second [Format Setting]
xxxxxxxx_
YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.CSV
Designation of a file name by
SMPLCSV_BAK2 the device memory page 4-144
After _: Output time in year,
month, day, hour,
minute, and second

2-22
 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

2.3.2 Recipe

Setting procedure
1. Select [System Setting]  [Recipe], and specify a recipe number.
The [Recipe Edit] window is displayed.
2
Recipe No.

2. In the [File Format] tab window, set and change settings of the selected recipe number.

2-23
CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

Setting details

Select an option according to the CSV file.

• [Line: Record, Column: Data]

CSV file Columns are in the same format.

DEC CHAR DEC

  
Record Line A 1 A 100
Line B 2 B 200
Line C 3 C 300
Format Line/Column Line D 4 D 400
Setting Contents Data

• [Line: Data, Column: Record]

CSV file Record

Line A Line B Line C Line D

DEC  1 2 3 4 Data
Lines are in the CHAR  A B C D
same format.
DEC  100 200 300 400

2-24
 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

Set how to treat the first column in the CSV file.

• Unchecked
The first column in the CSV file is treated as data.

CSV file Display on MONITOUCH

6000 15 200 ..\ #1 #2 #3 2
6100 15 201 #1 6000 15 200
6200 20 202 #2 6100 15 201
6300 20 203 #3 6200 20 202
#4 6300 20 203
Add record
name *1
• Checked
The first column in the CSV file is treated as a record name.

CSV file Display on MONITOUCH

ITEM1 6000 15 200 ..\ #1 #2 #3
ITEM2 6100 15 201 ITEM1 6000 15 200
ITEM3 6200 20 202 ITEM2 6100 15 201
ITEM4 6300 20 203 ITEM3 6200 20 202
ITEM4 6300 20 203

Set how to treat the first line in the CSV file.

• Unchecked
The first line in the CSV file is treated as data.
CSV file Display on MONITOUCH

6000 15 200 ..\ #1 #2 #3

Format
6100 15 201 #1 6000 15 200
Setting
6200 20 202 #2 6100 15 201

6300 20 203 #3 6200 20 202

#4 6300 20 203
Add title to data
*1
• Checked
The first line in the CSV file is treated as title.
CSV file Display on MONITOUCH

Title1 Title2 Title3 ..\ Title1 Title2 Title3

6000 15 200 #1 6000 15 200

6100 15 201 #2 6100 15 201

6200 20 202 #3 6200 20 202

6300 20 203 #4 6300 20 203

Select a delimiter used in the CSV file.

Delimiter , (comma) / <tab> (tab) / . (period)
* When “.” (period) is selected, a comma is used for a decimal point.
Number of Set this option when transferring data on a file-by-file basis.
Records Specify the number of records to contain in one file.
Number of Data Specify the number of data to contain in one record.
(1 - 4096) * The column of record names is not counted.
The number of words used is automatically calculated.
Occupied • When transferring data on a record-by-record basis:
Words Total number of words in one record
(1 - 65535) • When transferring data on a file-by-file basis:
Total number of words in one file

2-25
CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

Specify the data format in the CSV file.

• Record Name
This option is enabled when [Add record name] is checked.
Specify the number of characters and the order of text processing for
a record name.

Format • 1-
Data Type
Setting Specify the data format.
- Data Type: DEC, DEC-, HEX, OCT, BIN, CHAR, BCD,
FLOAT
- Data Length: 1-Word, 2-Word
- Decimal Point: 0 - 32
- Characters: 2 - 255
- Text Process: LSB  MSB, MSB  LSB
This option is enabled when [Add record name] is checked.
Transfer • [Data]
Device Transfer Target Only data is transferred.
Setting • [Record Name + Data]
Both record name and data are transferred.

*1 When both title and record name are used:

CSV file Display on MONITOUCH

- Title1 Title2 Title3 ..\ Title1 Title2 Title3

ITEM1 6000 15 200 ITEM1 6000 15 200
ITEM2 6100 15 201 ITEM2 6100 15 201
ITEM3 6200 20 202 ITEM3 6200 20 202
ITEM4 6300 20 203 ITEM4 6300 20 203

2-26
 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

V8-compatible settings
When using a recipe macro, the following settings are necessary:

Recipe File No. Specify a number when using a LD_RECIPE, LD_RECIPESEL,

SV_RECIPE, or SV_RECIPESEL macro.
Set the CSV file number (REC0000.CSV to REC9999.CSV) that
corresponds to the format of the recipe setting.
Location of the CSV file
Storage \ (access folder) \ RECIPE folder
Group Folder Set a group folder name when executing a recipe macro by randomly
Individual
Name specifying CSV file names.
Setting
(8 one-byte • [Add]
upper-case Creates a group folder in which CSV files are to be stored.
alphanumeric
characters or The folder name can be changed as desired.
less) • [Delete]
Deletes a group folder.
* All CSV files contained in the group folder use the same format
settings.
Default Recipe This is common to all recipe settings.
No. Format settings of the default recipe number take effect in the following
cases:
Common
• There is no recipe setting that corresponds to the file named
Setting
“RECxxxx.csv”.
• A group folder that does not exist in the recipe setting is added to the
storage via Explore.

• Relationship between the recipe setting and the CSV file

- Recipe setting - Storage
RECIPE
Recipe No. Group Folders
NORMAL
NORMAL
Recipe [0] TARGET TARGET
TEST PRODUCT1.CSV Using the format settings
PRODUCT2.CSV of Recipe [0]
Recipe [1]
PRODUCT3.CSV
Default Recipe No. 1 = Recipe [1] PRODUCT4.CSV
PRODUCT5.CSV
PRODUCT6.CSV
TEST
TEST1.CSV
TEST2.CSV
TEST3.CSV
TOTAL
FINAL1.CSV Using the format settings
FINAL2.CSV of Recipe [1]
FINAL3.CSV (Default recipe No.)
FINAL4.CSV
FINAL5.CSV

2-27
CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

CSV File Name and Storage Target

Depending on the name of a CSV file, its location and file designation vary. Create a file
according to your purpose.

File name Store target

RECxxxx.CSV Access folder\RECIPE\

0000 - 9999 See the following:

xxxxxxxx.CSV Access folder\RECIPE\(group folder)\

8 one-byte upper-case 8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters or less

alphanumeric characters
or less See the following:

Storage EXT0000 Access folder

BITMAP
CARD
DSP
FONT
HDCOPY
JPEG
MEMO
RECIPE

NORMAL
TARGET
PRODUCT1.CSV
PRODUCT2.CSV
PRODUCT3.CSV Group folders*
PRODUCT4.CSV
PRODUCT5.CSV
PRODUCT6.CSV
TEST
TEST1.CSV
TEST2.CSV
TEST3.CSV

REC0000.CSV
REC0001.CSV
REC0002.CSV

* Group folders are defined in [Format Setting]  [V8 Compatible Setting].

They are automatically created when MONITOUCH recognizes the storage.

2-28
 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

Total Number of CSV Files

There is a limitation on the number of group folders and CSV files that can be handled in the
recipe mode.
• The total of group folders and CSV files in the RECIPE folder: 1,024 maximum
• The number of CSV files in a group folder: 1,024 maximum 2
Any more folders and files than HDCOPY
1,024 are not recognized in the
JPEG
recipe mode.
MEMO
* When access to CSV files is
RECIPE
made by a macro command,
NORMAL : 1,024 maximum
this limitation is not imposed.
TARGET
The time for accessing : 1,024 maximum
PRODUCT1.CSV
increases proportionately with PRODUCT2.CSV : 1,024 maximum
the number of files. PRODUCT3.CSV
PRODUCT4.CSV
PRODUCT5.CSV
PRODUCT6.CSV
TEST
TEST1.CSV
TEST2.CSV
TEST3.CSV
REC0001.CSV
REC0002.CSV
REC0003.CSV
SAMPLE
SNAP

Data in CSV File

• The number of words to be transferred

A maximum of 65536 words can be read and written at one time in recipe mode or a
macro. If you attempt to transfer data exceeding capacity, 65536 words are transferred,
but extra words will not be transferred.

• Lines and columns

The number of lines/columns to be handled varies, depending on the format setting.

Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record

Number of lines 1 - 32767 1 - 4096 *3
Number of 1 - 4096 *2 1 - 4096
columns *1
*1 Excel is capable of handling a maximum of 256 columns.
*2 The maximum number of words per column: 4,096 words
*3 The maximum number of words per line: 4,096 words
*4 File size: 1 MB or less

• Number of bytes for record

64 bytes maximum per record
* This setting can be made in [Format Setting].

• Number of bytes for a title name

64 bytes maximum per title

2-29
CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

2.3.3 Sampling

Alarm Server

Setting procedure
1. Select [Alarm Server]  [Alarm Block].
The [Alarm Block] window is displayed.
2. In the [Form Setting] tab window, double-click on the block number to be output in CSV
format. The [Format] dialog appears.

Setting details
• [Alarm]

Specify a title Specify a title to be added to the header in the CSV file.
History Display Set the display order of alarm history.
Calendar Condition Select a format of date display to be output in the CSV file.
Display the primary cause Only error messages of primary causes are output in the
only CSV file.
Add a (*) mark to the primary Primary cause messages are output with (*) marks
cause appended in the CSV file.

2-30
 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

• [Event]

Specify a title Specify a title to be added to the header in the CSV file.
Calendar Condition Check this box to output the date in the CSV file.
Output Information Select a status to output.
Activate Status Display Select a format of status display to be output in the CSV
file.

2-31
CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

Logging Server

Setting procedure
1. Select [Logging Server]  [Logging Block].
The [Logging Block] window is displayed.
2. In the [Form Setting] tab window, double-click on the block number to be output in CSV
format. The [Format] dialog appears.

Setting details

Specify a title Specify a title to be added to the header in the CSV file.
Calendar Condition Select a format of date display to be output in the CSV
file.
Display in msec Check this box to output the time data in the unit of
msec in the CSV file.

2-32
 CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

CSV File Name and Storage Target

For “SMPL_CSV”

File Name Storage Target

(User-specified name).CSV
• Alarm server 2
(access folder)\ALARM\
* A maximum of 64 one-byte characters can
be used as a user-specified name. • Logging Server
(access folder)\LOGGING\

Example: Alarm server

Storage EXT0000 Access folder
BITMAP
CARD
DSP
FONT
HDCOPY
JPEG
MEMO
RECIPE
ALARM
SMP_00.CSV

LOGGING

2-33
CSV Format Setting (with Recipe or Sampling Macro Used)

For “SMPLCSV_BAK/SMPLCSV_BAK2”

File Name Storage Target

• Alarm server
(User-specified name)_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.CSV (access folder)\ALARM\(year/
month folder)\(year/month/day
Output time in year, month, folder)
day, hour, minute, and second
• Logging Server
* A maximum of 64 one-byte characters can be used (access folder)\LOGGING\(year/
as a user-specified name. month folder)\(year/month/day
folder)

Example: Alarm server

Storage EXT0000 Access folder
BITMAP
CARD
DSP
FONT
HDCOPY
JPEG
MEMO
RECIPE
ALARM
201404 Year/month folder
20140420 Year/month/day folder
TEST_20140420122000.CSV Output at 12:20:00
TEST_20140420201530.CSV on April 20, 2014
Output at 20:15:30
~

LOGGING on April 20, 2014

SNAP
SRAM
WAV
WEBSERV

2-34
3
3.1
Command

Macro Command List

 Macro Command List

3.1 Macro Command List

Category Command Name Mnemonic Contents Refer to:

F0 = F1 + F2 (W)
ADD(+) Addition page 4-2
F0 = F1 + F2 (D)
F0 = F1  F2 (W)
SUB(-) Subtraction page 4-4
F0 = F1  F2 (D)
Arithmetical F0 = F1 F2 (W)
MUL(X) Multiplication page 4-6
Operation F0 = F1 F2 (D)

DIV(/)
F0 = F1 / F2 (W)
Division page 4-8
3
F0 = F1 / F2 (D)
F0 = F1 % F2 (W)
MOD(%) Remainder of division page 4-9
F0 = F1 % F2 (D)
F0 = F1 & F2 (W)
AND(&) Logical product page 4-10
F0 = F1 & F2 (D)
F0 = F1 | F2 (W)
OR(|) Logical add page 4-11
F0 = F1 | F2 (D)
Logical F0 = F1 ^ F2 (W)
XOR(^) Exclusive OR page 4-12
Operation F0 = F1 ^ F2 (D)
F0 = F1 << F2 (W)
SHL(<<) Left shift page 4-13
F0 = F1 << F2 (D)
F0 = F1 >> F2 (W)
SHR(>>) Right shift page 4-14
F0 = F1 >> F2 (D)
F0 = MAX (F1 C:F2) (W)
MAX Maximum page 4-15
F0 = MAX (F1 C:F2) (D)
F0 = MIN (F1 C:F2) (W)
MIN Minimum page 4-16
F0 = MIN (F1 C:F2) (D)
Statistic
F0 = AVG (F1 C:F2) (W)
AVG Average page 4-17
F0 = AVG (F1 C:F2) (D)
F0 = SUM (F1 C:F2) (W)
SUM Sum page 4-18
F0 = SUM (F1 C:F2) (D)
EXP F0 = EXP (F1) (F) Exponent page 4-19
EXPT F0 = EXPT (F1,F2) (F) Powers page 4-20
LN F0 = LN (F1) (F) Natural logarithms page 4-21
LOG F0 = LOG (F1) (F) Common logarithms page 4-22
SQRT F0 = SQRT (F1) (F) Square roots page 4-23
F0 = ABS (F1) (W)
ABS F0 = ABS (F1) (D) Absolute value page 4-24
F0 = ABS (F1) (F)
F0 = NEG (F1) (W)
NEG F0 = NEG (F1) (D) Sign inversion page 4-25
Mathematics/ F0 = NEG (F1) (F)
trigonometric
SIN F0 = SIN (F1) (F) Sine page 4-26
COS F0 = COS (F1) (F) Cosine page 4-27
TAN F0 = TAN (F1) (F) Tangent page 4-28
ASIN F0 = ASIN (F1) (F) Arcsine page 4-29
ACOS F0 = ACOS (F1) (F) Arccosine page 4-30
ATAN F0 = ATAN (F1) (F) Arctangent page 4-31
Convert radians 
DEG F0 = DEG (F1) (F) page 4-32
degrees
Convert degrees 
RAD F0 = RAD (F1) (F) page 4-33
radians

3-1
Macro Command List

Category Command Name Mnemonic Contents Refer to:

BSET F0 (ON) Bit set (ON) page 4-34
Bit Operation BCLR F0 (OFF) Bit reset (OFF) page 4-35
BINV F0 (INV) Bit inversion page 4-36
F0 = F1 BCD (W)
BCD Conversion to BCD page 4-37
F0 = F1 BCD (D)
F0 = F1 BIN (W)
BIN Conversion to BIN page 4-38
F0 = F1 BIN (D)
Convert one-word 
CWD F0 = F1 D <- W page 4-39
double-word
F0 = F1 PLC <- (W) Convert DEC 
CVP page 4-40
F0 = F1 PLC <- (D) PLC1
F0 = F1 (W) PLC F2 <- Convert DEC 
CVPFMT page 4-41
F0 = F1 (D) PLC F2 <- PLCn
F0 = F1 (W) <- PLC Convert PLC1 
CVB page 4-42
F0 = F1 (D) <- PLC DEC
F0 = F1 (W) <- PLC F2 Convert PLCn 
CVBFMT page 4-43
F0 = F1 (D) <- PLC F2 DEC
SWAP F0 C:F1 Swap MSB with LSB page 4-44
Convert text  code
Conversion CHR F0 = ‘ ‘ page 4-45
(PLC1 code fixed)
STRING F0 = ‘ ‘ (STRING) Convert text  code page 4-46
Convert real number
CVFD F0 (D) <- F1 (F) F2 (D) page 4-47
 BIN
Convert BIN  real
CVDF F0 (F) <- F1 (D) F2 (D) Page 4-49
number
Convert calendar
CLND_TO_GRE CLND_TO_GRE F0 F1 F2 data  GMT-based page 4-51
UNIX time
Convert GMT-based
GRE_TO_CLND GRE_TO_CLND F0 F1 F2 UNIX time  page 4-53
calendar data
Convert string 
FORMAT_DATA FORMAT_DATA F0 F1 F2 page 4-55
numerical data
Convert numerical
FORMAT_STR FORMAT_STR F0 F1 F2 page 4-59
data  string
F0 = F1 (W)
MOV Transfer page 4-63
F0 = F1 (D)
F0 = F1 C:F2 (BMOV) (W)
BMOV Block transfer page 4-64
F0 = F1 C:F2 (BMOV) (D)
(With data
Transfer F0 = F1 C:F2 (CVMOV) (W)
CVMOV conversion) page 4-66
F0 = F1 C:F2 (CVMOV) (D)
Block transfer
F0 = F1 C:F2 (CVSMOV) (W) (With text conversion)
CVSMOV page 4-69
F0 = F1 C:F2 (CVSMOV) (D) Block transfer
FILL F0 = F1 C:F2 (FILL) Transfer all page 4-71

3-2
 Macro Command List

Category Command Name Mnemonic Contents Refer to:

IF (F0 = F1)F2 (W)
CMP Comparison page 4-72
IF (F0 = F1)F2 (D)
IFZ (F0 & F1) F2 (W) Logical product
TST page 4-74
IFZ (F0 & F1) F2 (D) comparison
Comparison IF (F0 (condition) F1) (W)
IF IF (F0 (condition) F1) (D)
ELSE IF ((condition) F0) (B) Conditional branch page 4-75
ENDIF ELSE
ENDIF
CALL CALL F0 Macro block call page 4-77 3
JMP JMP F0 Jump page 4-79
LABEL LB F0: Label page 4-80
Loop between FOR
Macro FOR/NEXT FOR F0 / NEXT page 4-81
and NEXT
Operation
Control Finish macro
RET RET page 4-83
processing
Execute switch
SWRET SWRET page 4-84
function
EN_INT EN_INT Interruption enabled page 4-85
FROM_WR FROM_WR F0 F1 Write to FROM page 4-86
FROM Backup
FROM_RD FROM_RD F0 F1 Read from FROM page 4-87
Calendar control for
PLC_CLND PLC_CLND F0 PLC F1 F2 F3 page 4-88
PLCn
PLC_CTL PLC_CTRL PLC F0 F1 F2 PLCn control page 4-90
PLC TBL_READ F0 <- TABLE : PLC F1 Read from device
TBL_READ page 4-92
: F2 memory map
TBL_WRITE TABLE : PLC F1 : F0 Write to device
TBL_WRITE page 4-93
<- F2 memory map
Transfer on the
SEND SEND F0 C:F1 TO F2 page 4-94
network
Ethernet
EREAD EREAD F0 = F1 C:F2 F3 Read on the network page 4-95
EWRITE EWRITE F0 F1 = F2 C:F3 Write on the network page 4-96

3-3
Macro Command List

Category Command Name Mnemonic Contents Refer to:

LD_RECIPE LD_RECIPE F0 F1 page 4-97
LD_RECIPE2 LD_RECIPE2 F0 F1 F2 page 4-100
Read CSV file
LD_RECIPESEL LD_RECIPESEL F0 F1 page 4-102
LD_RECIPESEL2 LD_RECIPESEL2 F0 F1 F2 page 4-105
SV_RECIPE SV_RECIPE F0 F1 F2 page 4-109
SV_RECIPE2 SV_RECIPE2 F0 F1 F2 F3 page 4-111
Save to CSV file
SV_RECIPESEL SV_RECIPESEL F0 F1 page 4-113
SV_RECIPESEL2 SV_RECIPESEL2 F0 F1 F2 page 4-116
SET_
SET_RECIPEFOLDER F0 Folder designation page 4-118
RECIPEFOLDER
Storage RD_RECIPE_FIL
RD_RECIPE_FILE F0 F1 page 4-120
(Recipe) E
RD_RECIPE_LIN
RD_RECIPE_LINE F0 F1 F2 F3 Read CSV file page 4-122
E
RD_RECIPE_ RD_RECIPE_COLUMN F0 F1 F2
page 4-124
COLUMN F3
WR_RECIPE_FIL
WR_RECIPE_FILE F0 F1 page 4-126
E
WR_RECIPE_LIN
WR_RECIPE_LINE F0 F1 F2 F3 Save to CSV file page 4-128
E
WR_RECIPE_ WR_RECIPE_COLUMN F0 F1 F2
page 4-130
COLUMN F3
GET_RECIPE_ GET_RECIPE_FILEINFO F0 F1
CSV file information page 4-132
FILEINFO F2
SMPL_BAK SMPL_BAK F0 Save backup page 4-134
SMPL_CSV SMPL_CSV F0 Create CSV file page 4-136
Create CSV file (file
SMPL_CSV2 SMPL_CSV2 F0 F1 page 4-138
name designation)
Storage Save logging/alarm
SMPL_SAVE SMPL_SAVE page 4-140
(Sampling) data stored in SRAM
Save backup
SMPLCSV_BAK SMPLCSV_BAK F0 page 4-141
(CSV file)
Save backup
SMPLCSV_BAK2 SMPLCSV_BAK2 F0 F1 (CSV file, file name page 4-144
designation)
HDCOPY HDCOPY Hardcopy page 4-146
HDCOPY2 HDCOPY2 F0 Hardcopy page 4-147
Hardcopy
HDCOPY3 HDCOPY3 F0 (file name page 4-148
designation)
Storage
(Others) SET_DRIVE SET_DRIVE F0 Select drive page 4-149
COPY_FILE COPY_FILE F0 F1 Copy file page 4-150
MOVE_FILE MOVE_FILE F0 F1 F2 Move file page 4-152
READ_FILE READ_FILE F0 F1 F2 F3 Read universal file page 4-154
WRITE_FILE WRITE_FILE F0 F1 F2 Write to universal file page 4-156
F_ADD(+) F0 = F1 + F2 (F) Real number addition page 4-158
Real number
Real No. F_SUB(-) F0 = F1  F2 (F) page 4-159
subtraction
Arithmetical
Real number
Operation F_MUL(X) F0 = F1  F2 (F) page 4-160
multiplication
F_DIV(/) F0 = F1 / F2 (F) Real number division page 4-161

3-4
 Macro Command List

Category Command Name Mnemonic Contents Refer to:

Sum of real number
F_SUM F0 = F_SUM (F1 C:F2) (F) page 4-162
data
Average of real
F_AVG F0 = F_AVG (F1 C:F2) (F) page 4-163
Real No. number data
Statistics Maximum of real
F_MAX F0 = F_MAX (F1 C:F2) (F) page 4-164
number data
Minimum of real
F_MIN F0 = F_MIN (F1 C:F2) (F) page 4-165
number data
;(Comment) ; Comment page 4-166

BRIGHT BRIGHT F0
Brightness
page 4-167
3
adjustment
GET_MSGBLK GET_MSGBLK F0 F1 Message acquisition page 4-168
PLC_ULR PLC_ULR F0 F1 Read user log page 4-169
Multi-drop
RECONNECT RECONNECT F0 page 4-171
reconnection (PLC1)
RECONNECT_EX RECONNECT_EX PLC F0 F1 Restart page 4-172
Acquire logging/alarm
SAMPLE SAMPLE F0 F1 F2 page 4-173
data
SEARCH_FILE SEARCH_FILE F0 F1 Search for JPEG files page 4-176
ADJ_VOLUME ADJ_VOLUME F0 F1 F2 Adjust volume page 4-177
Save volume
SAVE_VOLUME SAVE_VOLUME page 4-178
adjustment value
TREND Refresh trend data
TREND REFRESH F0 F1 page 4-179
REFRESH display
Screen number
SYS (SET_SCRN) F1 page 4-180
designation
Multi-overlap/global
SYS (SET_MOVLP) F1 page 4-181
overlap setting
SYS (OVLP_SHOW) F1 Overlap ON/OFF page 4-183
Others SYS (OVLP_POS) F1 Overlap relocation page 4-184
SYS (GET_MSG) F1 Message acquisition page 4-185
Acquisition of X and
SYS (GET_XY) F1 Y coordinates on page 4-186
circumference
SYS (SET_BZ) F1 Buzzer control page 4-188
System time
SYS (GET_TIME) F1 page 4-189
acquisition
SYS SYS (STA_TIME) F1 Timer setting page 4-190
SYS (GET_CLND) F1 Calendar acquisition page 4-192
SYS (SET_CLND) F1 Calendar setting page 4-193
Logging information page 4-194
SYS (SET_BUFNO) F1
Alarm log information page 4-196
Acquire logging/alarm
SYS (GET_SMPL) F1 page 4-197
data
Cursor point
SYS (GET_SCUR) F1 page 4-199
acquisition
Show/hide numerical
SYS (DSP_DATA) F1 page 4-201
data display
Change numerical
SYS (CHG_DATA) F1 page 4-202
data display property
SYS (STA_LIST) F1 Data sheet print page 4-204

3-5
Macro Command List

Category Command Name Mnemonic Contents Refer to:

SYS (SET_BKLT) F1 Backlight control page 4-206
SYS (RESTART) F1 Restart page 4-207
SYS (CHG_LANG) F1 Language change page 4-208
SYS (RESET_SCRN) F1 Redisplay screen page 4-210
Others SYS
Universal serial page 4-211
SYS (OUT_ENQ) F1
A-link + Net10 page 4-212
System calendar
SYS (SET_SYS_CLND) F1 page 4-213
setting

3-6
4
4.1
Details of Macro
Commands

Guide to Chapter 4
4.2 Arithmetical Operation
4.3 Logical Operation
4.4 Statistic
4.5 Mathematics/trigonometric
4.6 Bit Operation
4.7 Conversion
4.8 Transfer
4.9 Comparison
4.10 Macro Operation Control
4.11 FROM Backup
4.12 PLC
4.13 Ethernet
4.14 Storage (Recipe)
4.15 Storage (Sampling)
4.16 Storage (Others)
4.17 Real No. Arithmetical Operation
4.18 Real No. Statistics
4.19 Others
 Guide to Chapter 4

4.1 Guide to Chapter 4

Command Name Mnemonic

Applicable model *1

4
Types of device memory usable for the
command and how to designate them
For more information on the types of device
memory, refer to page 2-19.
For more information on the indirect memory
designation, refer to page 2-20.

Example of command execution

Notes on the command

*1 Refer to “V Series Models” in this manual.

4-1
Arithmetical Operation

4.2 Arithmetical Operation

ADD(+) F0 = F1 + F2 (W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 + F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Addition
This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] plus [F2] to [F0].

WORD DWORD
F1 F1+1 F1
F2 F2+1 F2
F0 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0
32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1
(Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2

Example
• $u100 = $u200 + $u300 (W)
$u200 5
$u300 100
$u100 105

• $u100 = $u200 + $u300 (D)

$u201 $u200 70000
$u301 $u300 100
$u101 $u100 70100

4-2
 Arithmetical Operation

Supplemental remarks
• Operation is performed in the decimal system with signs. Be sure that the
result [F0] falls within the permissible range.

$u100 = $u200 + $u300 (W)

DEC- HEX
$u200 30000 7530
$u300 5000 1388
$u100 -30536 88B8
8000 - FFFF are negative in
NG the decimal system with signs.

* The execution result in the example above is an overflow.

If an operation results in “65535” in the decimal system (WORD) or less, it

matches the result in the decimal system without signs.
4
DEC HEX
$u200 30000 7530
$u300 5000 1388
$u100 35000 88B8
8000 - FFFF are positive in the
OK decimal system without signs.

* The execution result in the example above is an overflow.

• In a case where [F1] and [F2] are specified in the following ranges, they are
treated as negative values 1 to 32768.
32768 - 65535 (DEC)
100000 - 17777 (OCT)
8000 - FFFF (HEX)

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-3
Arithmetical Operation

SUB(-) F0 = F1 - F2 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 - F2 (D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Subtraction
This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] minus [F2] to [F0].
WORD DWORD
F1 F1+1 F1
F2 F2+1 F2
F0 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0
32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1
(Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2

Example
• $u100 = $u200  $u300 (W)
$u200 100
$u300 40
$u100 60
• $u100 = $u200  $u300 (D)
$u201 $u200 70000
$u301 $u300 100
$u101 $u100 69900

Supplemental remarks
• Operation is performed in the decimal system with signs. Be sure that the
result [F0] falls within the permissible range.

DEC- HEX
$u200 -30000 8AD0
$u300 5000 1388
$u100 30536 7748
0000 - 7FFF are positive in
NG the decimal system with signs.

* The execution result in the example above is an underflow.

4-4
 Arithmetical Operation

• In a case where [F1] and [F2] are specified in the following ranges, they are
treated as negative values 1 to 32768.
32768 - 65535 (DEC)
100000 - 17777 (OCT)
8000 - FFFF (HEX)

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development) 4

4-5
Arithmetical Operation

MUL(X) F0 = F1 x F2 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 x F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Multiplication
This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] multiplied by [F2] to [F0].

WORD DWORD
F1 F1+1 F1
F2 F2+1 F2
F0 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0
32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1
(Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2

Example
• $u100 = $u200 $u300 (W)

$u200 100
$u300 40
$u100 4000

• $u100 = $u200 $u300 (D)

$u201 $u200 40000

$u301 $u300 2
$u101 $u100 80000

4-6
 Arithmetical Operation

Supplemental remarks
• Operation is performed in the decimal system with signs. Be sure that the
result [F0] falls within the permissible range.

DEC- HEX
$u200 30000 7530
$u300 2 0002
$u100 -5536 EA60
8000 - FFFF are negative in
NG the decimal system with signs.

* The execution result in the example above is an overflow.

If an operation results in “65535” (WORD) or less, it matches the result in the

decimal system without signs.

$u200
DEC
30000
HEX
7530
4
$u300 2 0002
$u100 60000 EA60
8000 - FFFF are positive in the
OK decimal system without signs.

* The execution result in the example above is an overflow.

• If the result [F0] is outside the permissible range, the extra portion is
truncated.

DEC- HEX
$u200 30000 7530
$u300 3 0003
$u100 24464 15F90
Portion outside the
NG range truncated
5F90
* The execution result in the example above is normal.

In this case, operation is performed in DWORD.

DEC-
$u201 $u200 30000
$u301 $u300 3
$u101 $u100 90000

• In a case where [F1] and [F2] are specified in the following ranges, they are
treated as negative values 1 to 32768.
32768 - 65535 (DEC)
100000 - 17777 (OCT)
8000 - FFFF (HEX)

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-7
Arithmetical Operation

DIV(/) F0 = F1 / F2 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 / F2 (D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Division
This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] divided by [F2] to [F0].

WORD DWORD
F1 F1+1 F1
F2 F2+1 F2
F0 Remainder F0+1 F0 Remainder

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0
32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1
(Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2

Example
• $u100 = $u200 / $u300 (W)
$u200 100
$u300 40
$u100 Remainder 2 20

• $u100 = $u200 / $u300 (D)

$u201 $u200 80000
$u301 $u300 30000
$u101 $u100 Remainder 2 20000

Supplemental remarks
• Operation is performed in the decimal system with signs. Be sure that the [F1]
value falls within the permissible range.
• In a case where [F1] and [F2] are specified in the following ranges, they are
treated as negative values 1 to 32768.
32768 - 65535 (DEC)
100000 - 17777 (OCT)
8000 - FFFF (HEX)
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
3 Calculation operation execution error
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-8
 Arithmetical Operation

MOD(%) F0 = F1 % F2 (W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 % F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Remainder of division
This macro command is used to write the remainder of [F1] divided by [F2] to [F0].

WORD DWORD
F1 F1+1 F1
F2 F2+1 F2
Quotient F0 Quotient F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1 4
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0
32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1
(Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2

Example
• $u100 = $u200 % $u300 (W)
$u200 100
$u300 40
Quotient $u100 2 20
• $u100 = $u200 % $u300 (D)
$u201 $u200 80000
$u301 $u300 30000
Quotient $u101 $u100 2 20000

Supplemental remarks
• Operation is performed in the decimal system with signs. Be sure that the [F1]
value falls within the permissible range.
• In a case where [F1] and [F2] are specified in the following ranges, they are
treated as negative values 1 to 32768.
32768 - 65535 (DEC)
100000 - 17777 (OCT)
8000 - FFFF (HEX)
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
3 Calculation operation execution error
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-9
Logical Operation

4.3 Logical Operation

AND(&) F0 = F1 & F2 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 & F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Logical product
This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] ANDed with [F2] bit by bit
to [F0].

WORD DWORD Logical product

F1 F1+1 F1 0 0 1 1
AND AND AND AND AND AND
F2 F2+1 F2 0 1 0 1
   
F0 F0+1 F0 0 0 0 1

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0
0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1
(HEX) (HEX)
F2

Example
• $u100 = $u200 & $u300 (W)
15 0
$u200 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
AND
$u300 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

$u100 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

• $u100 = $u200 & $u300 (D)

31 0
$u201 $u200 1 1 1 1 - 0 0 1 0
AND
$u301 $u300 0 1 0 0 - 1 0 0 1

$u101 $u100 0 1 0 0 - 0 0 0 0

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-10
 Logical Operation

OR(|) F0 = F1 | F2 (W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 | F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Logical add
This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] ORed with [F2] bit by bit to
[F0].

WORD DWORD Logical add

F1 F1+1 F1 0 0 1 1
OR OR OR OR OR OR
F2 F2+1 F2 0 1 0 1
   
F0 F0+1 F0 0 1 1 1

Available device memory 4

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0
0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1
(HEX) (HEX)
F2

Example
• $u100 = $u200 | $u300 (W)
15 0
$u200 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
OR
$u300 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

$u100 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1

• $u100 = $u200 | $u300 (D)

31 0
$u201 $u200 1 1 1 1 - 0 0 1 0
OR
$u301 $u300 0 1 0 0 - 1 0 0 1

$u101 $u100 1 1 1 1 - 1 0 1 1

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-11
Logical Operation

XOR(^) F0 = F1 ^ F2 (W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 ^ F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Exclusive OR
This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] XORed with [F2] bit by bit
to [F0].

WORD DWORD Exclusive OR

F1 F1+1 F1 0 0 1 1
XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR XOR
F2 F2+1 F2 0 1 0 1
   
F0 F0+1 F0 0 1 1 0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0
0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1
(HEX) (HEX)
F2

Example
• $u100 = $u200 ^ $u300 (W)
15 0
$u200 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
XOR
$u300 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

$u100 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1

• $u100 = $u200 ^ $u300 (D)

31 0
$u201 $u200 1 1 1 1 - 0 0 1 0
XOR
$u301 $u300 0 1 0 0 - 1 0 0 1

$u101 $u100 1 0 1 1 - 1 0 1 1

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-12
 Logical Operation

SHL(<<) F0 = F1 << F2 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 << F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Left shift
This macro command is used to perform logical shift of [F1] to the left by the
number of bits specified in [F2] and write the result to [F0]. The higher-order bits
(by the number in [F2]) are truncated. “0” is assigned to the lower-order bits (by
the number in [F2]).
15 0
F0 -
Left shift by 1
F0 Truncated 0
Left shift by 2
F0 Truncated 0 0

F0 Truncated 0 0 0
Left shift by 15
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4
Available device memory
Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1 (HEX) (HEX)
F2 0 - 15 0 - 31

Example
• $u100 = $u200 << 3 (W)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$u200 - 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Left shift by 3
$u100 Truncated 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0

• $u100 = $u200 << 2 (D)

31 30 29 - 10 9 8 7 - 1 0
$u201 $u200 - 1 0 1 - 0 1 0 0 - 0 1
Left shift by 2
$u101 $u100 Truncated 1 - 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-13
Logical Operation

SHR(>>) F0 = F1 >> F2 (W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 >> F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Right shift
This macro command is used to perform logical shift of [F1] to the right by the
number of bits specified in [F2] and write the result to [F0]. The lower-order bits (by
the number in [F2]) are truncated. “0” is assigned to the higher-order bits (by the
number in [F2]).
15 0
F0 -
Right shift by 1
F0 0 Truncated
Right shift by 2
F0 0 0 Truncated
Right shift by 15
F0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Truncated

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1 (HEX) (HEX)
F2 0 - 15 0 - 31

Example
• $u100 = $u200 >> 3 (W)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$u200 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 -
Right shift by 3
$u100 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 Truncated

• $u100 = $u200 >> 2 (D)

31 30 29 - 10 9 8 7 - 1 0
$u201 $u200 1 0 1 - 0 1 0 0 - 0 1 -
Right shift by 2
$u101 $u100 0 0 1 0 1 - 0 1 0 0 - Truncated

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-14
 Statistic

4.4 Statistic

MAX F0 = MAX (F1 C : F2) (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = MAX (F1 C : F2) (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Maximum
This macro command is used to find the maximum data at the location starting
from the address specified in [F1] and write the result to [F0]. The data count is
specified in [F2].
WORD DWORD
1 F1 1 F1+1 F1
2 F1+1 2 F1+3 F1+2
3 F1+2 F0 3 F1+5 F1+4 F0
: MAX : MAX
:
F2
:
F2 4
Available device memory
Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1 (Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2 0 - 512 0 - 512

Example
• $u100 = MAX ($u200 C : 5) (W)
$u200 -100
$u201 1 MAX
$u202 32767 $u100 32767
$u203 -4500
$u204 336
• $u100 = MAX ($u200 C : 5) (D)
$u201 $u200 -70000
$u203 $u202 -1 MAX
$u205 $u204 2147483647 $u101 $u100 2147483647
$u207 $u206 450
$u209 $u208 8900000

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-15
Statistic

MIN F0 = MIN (F1 C : F2) (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = MIN (F1 C : F2) (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Minimum
This macro command is used to find the minimum data at the location starting
from the address specified in [F1] and write the result to [F0]. The data count is
specified in [F2].

WORD DWORD
1 F1 1 F1+1 F1
2 F1+1 2 F1+3 F1+2
3 F1+2 F0 3 F1+5 F1+4 F0
: : MIN : : MIN
F2 F2

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1 (Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2 0 - 512 0 - 512

Example
• $u100 = MIN ($u200 C : 5) (W)
$u200 -100
$u201 1 MIN
$u202 32767 $u100 -4500
$u203 -4500
$u204 336
• $u100 = MIN ($u200 C : 5) (D)
$u201 $u200 -70000
$u203 $u202 -1 MIN
$u205 $u204 2147483647 $u101 $u100 -70000
$u207 $u206 450
$u209 $u208 8900000

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-16
 Statistic

AVG F0 = AVG (F1 C : F2) (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = AVG (F1 C : F2) (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Average
This macro command is used to average the data at the location starting from the
address specified in [F1] and write the result to [F0]. The data count is specified in
[F2].

WORD DWORD
1 F1 1 F1+1 F1
2 F1+1 2 F1+3 F1+2
3 F1+2 F0 3 F1+5 F1+4 F0
: : AVG : : AVG
F2 F2

Available device memory 4

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1 (Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2 0 - 512 0 - 512

Example
• $u100 = AVG ($u200 C : 5) (W)
$u200 -100
$u201 200 AVG
$u202 30000 $u100 5200
$u203 -4500
$u204 400
• $u100 = AVG ($u200 C : 5) (D)
$u201 $u200 -70000
$u203 $u202 70000 AVG
$u205 $u204 2000000000 $u101 $u100 400000000
$u207 $u206 -8900000
$u209 $u208 8900000

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
3 Calculation operation execution error
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-17
Statistic

SUM F0 = SUM (F1 C : F2) (W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = SUM (F1 C : F2) (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Sum
This macro command is used to determine the sum of the data at the location
starting from the address specified in [F1] and write the result to [F0]. The data
count is specified in [F2].
WORD DWORD
1 F1 1 F1+1 F1
2 F1+1 2 F1+3 F1+2
3 F1+2 F0 3 F1+5 F1+4 F0
: : SUM : : SUM
F2 F2

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647
F1 (Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs)
F2 0 - 512 0 - 512

Example
• $u100 = SUM ($u200 C : 5) (W)
$u200 -100
$u201 200 SUM
$u202 30000 $u100 26000
$u203 -4500
$u204 400
• $u100 = SUM ($u200 C : 5) (D)
$u201 $u200 -70000
$u203 $u202 70000 SUM
$u205 $u204 2000000000 $u101 $u100 2000000000
$u207 $u206 -8900000
$u209 $u208 8900000

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-18
 Mathematics/trigonometric

4.5 Mathematics/trigonometric

EXP F0 = EXP(F1) (F)

All models Function: Calculation of the exponent

This macro command is used to store the exponent of [F1] in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

F1+1 F1 FLOAT

e F0+1 F0 FLOAT

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
memory memory
Memory card Constant
4
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• $u100 = EXP ($u200) (F)

2.71828 = e 1.0
When $u200 = “1.0”, on command execution “2.71828” is stored in $u100.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real number, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-19
Mathematics/trigonometric

EXPT F0 = EXPT(F1,F2) (F)

All models Function: Calculation of powers

This macro command is used to store [F1] to the power of [F2] in [F0].
Specify [F0], [F1], and [F2] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT F2+1 F2 FLOAT

F1+1 F1 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
F1 IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F2

Example
• $u100 = EXPT ($u200,$u300) (F)

8=23
When $u200 = “2” and $u300 = “3”, on command execution “8” is stored in
$u100.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
*1 Normal
0
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-20
 Mathematics/trigonometric

LN F0 = LN(F1) (F)

All models Function: Calculation of natural logarithms

This macro command is used to store the value of the natural logarithm of [F1] in
[F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
log e ( F1+1 F1 ) F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0 4
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• $u100 = LN ($u200) (F)
2.302585 = log e (10.0)
When $u200 = “10.0”, on command execution “2.302585” is stored in $u100.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real number, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
*1 Normal
0
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-21
Mathematics/trigonometric

LOG F0 = LOG(F1) (F)

All models Function: Calculation of common logarithms

This macro command is used to store the value of the common logarithm of [F1] in
[F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
log 10 ( F1+1 F1 ) F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• $u100 = LOG ($u200) (F)
1.0 = log 10 (10.0)
When $u200 = “10.0”, on command execution “1.0” is stored in $u100.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real number, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
*1 Normal
0
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-22
 Mathematics/trigonometric

SQRT F0 = SQRT(F1) (F)

All models Function: Calculation of square roots

This macro command is used to store the value of the square root of [F1] in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
л ( F1+1 F1 ) F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1 4
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• $u100 = SQRT ($u200) (F)

1.41421 = (2.0)
When $u200 = “2.0”, on command execution “1.41421” is stored in $u100.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real number, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-23
Mathematics/trigonometric

ABS F0 = ABS (F1) (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = ABS (F1) (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
F0 = ABS (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

Function: Absolute value

This macro command is used to store an absolute value of [F1] in [F0].

DWORD
WORD FLOAT
F1 + F0 F1+1 F1 + F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD FLOAT
F0 32767 to +32767 2147483647 to IEEE 32-bit single
(Decimal system with +2147483647 precision real
F1 signs) (Decimal system with signs) number

Example
• $u100 = ABS ($u200) (W)
When $u200 = “1”, on command execution “1” is stored in $u100.

$u200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BIN
F F F F HEX
-1 DEC
ABS

$u100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 BIN
0 0 0 1 HEX
1 DEC

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
*1 Normal
0
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-24
 Mathematics/trigonometric

NEG F0 = NEG (F1) (W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = NEG (F1) (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
F0 = NEG (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

Function: Sign inversion

This macro command is used to store a value with its sign inverted from [F1] in
[F0].
DWORD
WORD FLOAT
- F1 + F0 - F1+1 F1 + F0+1 F0

+ F1 - F0 + F1+1 F1 - F0+1 F0

Available device memory 4

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD FLOAT
F0 32767 to +32767 2147483647to IEEE 32-bit single
(Decimal system with +2147483647 precision real
F1 signs) (Decimal system with signs) number

Example
• $u100 = NEG ($u200) (W)
When $u200 = “1”, on command execution “1” is stored in $u100.

$u200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BIN
F F F F HEX
-1 DEC
NEG

$u100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 BIN
0 0 0 1 HEX
1 DEC

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-25
Mathematics/trigonometric

SIN F0 = SIN (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

All models Function: Sine

This macro command is used to store a sine of the angle (in radians) specified for
[F1] in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
F1+1 F1
SIN
 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• To obtain the value for sin 90 in radians;
$u200 = RAD (90) (F)
$u100 = SIN ($u200) (F)
The operation result of “1” is stored in $u100.

* The sine, cosine and tangent of the trigonometric functions can be obtained
based on the formulae below.
- Radian (circular measure)
1 rad = 360/2  Y axis
= approx. 57.29578 deg.
(0,1)
(x,y)
r
X axis

(-1,0) (0,0) (1,0)

(0,-1)

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• To convert the unit of an angle, use the macro command of DEG (page 4-32)
or RAD (page 4-33).

4-26
 Mathematics/trigonometric

COS F0 = COS (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

All models Function: Cosine

This macro command is used to store a cosine of the angle (in radians) specified
for [F1] in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
F1+1 F1
COS
 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0 4
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• To obtain the value for cos 0 in radians;
$u200 = RAD (0) (F)
$u100 = COS ($u200) (F)
The operation result of “1” is stored in $u100.

* For more information on cos of the trigonometric functions, refer to “Example” of

“Function: Sine” on page 4-26.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• To convert the unit of an angle, use the macro command of DEG (page 4-32)
or RAD (page 4-33).

4-27
Mathematics/trigonometric

TAN F0 = TAN (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

All models Function: Tangent

This macro command is used to store a tangent of the angle (in radians) specified
for [F1] in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
F1+1 F1
TAN
 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• To obtain the value for tan 45 in radians;
$u200 = RAD (45) (F)
$u100 = TAN ($u200) (F)
The operation result of “1” is stored in $u100.

* For more information on tan of the trigonometric functions, refer to “Example” of

“Function: Sine” on page 4-26.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2
3 Calculation operation execution error*3

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].
*3 When the value specified for [F1] is   (0.5 + n), “1” is stored in [F0]. (n: integer)
• To convert the unit of an angle, use the macro command of DEG (page 4-32)
or RAD (page 4-33).

4-28
 Mathematics/trigonometric

ASIN F0 = ASIN (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

All models Function: Arcsine

This macro command is used to store an arcsine of the angle (in radians)
specified for [F1] in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
SIN-1

F1+1 F1 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1 4
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1
Y axis
Example
• To obtain the value for sin-1 1; 2
1
$u100 = ASIN (1) (F)
The operation result of “1.570796” (= /2) X axis
is stored in $u100.
-1 0 1

-1
* The sin of the trigonometric functions is -1
expressed in the graph shown on the right.
2

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2
3 Calculation operation execution error*3

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].
*3 When the value specified for [F1] is outside the range from “-1” to “1”, “1” is stored in
[F0].
• To convert the unit of an angle, use the macro command of DEG (page 4-32)
or RAD (page 4-33).

4-29
Mathematics/trigonometric

ACOS F0 = ACOS (F1) (F). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

Function: Arccosine
All models
This macro command is used to store an arccosine of the angle (in radians)
specified for [F1] in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
COS-1

F1+1 F1 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• To obtain the value for cos-1 0;
$u100 = ACOS (0) (F)
The operation result of “1.570796” (= /2) is stored in $u100.
Y axis
* The cos-1 of the trigonometric functions is
expressed in the graph shown on the right.

X axis
-1 0 1

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2
3 Calculation operation execution error*3

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].
*3 When the value specified for [F1] is outside the range from “-1” to “1”, “1” is stored in
[F0].
• To convert the unit of an angle, use the macro command of DEG (page 4-32)
or RAD (page 4-33).

4-30
 Mathematics/trigonometric

ATAN F0 = ATAN (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

Function: Arctangent
All models
This macro command is used to store an arctangent of the angle (in radians)
specified for [F1] in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
TAN-1

F1+1 F1 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1 4
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• To obtain the value for tan-1 0;
$u100 = ATAN (0) (F)
The operation result of “0” is stored in $u100.
Y axis
* The tan-1 of the trigonometric
functions is expressed in the graph
shown on the right. 2

X axis
0

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].
• To convert the unit of an angle, use the macro command of DEG (page 4-32)
or RAD (page 4-33).

4-31
Mathematics/trigonometric

DEG F0 = DEG (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

All models Function: Convert radians to degrees

This macro command is used to convert the unit of an angle specified for [F1] from
radians to degrees and store the converted value in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
F1+1 F1
DEG
 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• To obtain a value in degrees;
$u100 = ASIN (1) (F)
$u200 = DEG ($u100) (F)
The operation result of “90” is stored in $u200.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
*1 Normal
0
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-32
 Mathematics/trigonometric

RAD F0 = RAD (F1) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FLOAT

All models Function: Convert degrees to radians

This macro command is used to convert the unit of an angle specified for [F1] from
degrees to radians and store the converted value in [F0].
Specify [F0] and [F1] as floating decimal point (FLOAT) type values.

FLOAT FLOAT
F1+1 F1
RAD
 F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
4
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1

Example
• To obtain 180 in radians;
$u100 = RAD (180) (F)
The operation result of “3.141592” (= ) is stored in $u100.

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Overflow*2
2 Underflow*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 An indefinite value is stored in [F0].

4-33
Bit Operation

4.6 Bit Operation

BSET F0 (ON)

Function: Bit set

All models
This macro command is used to set (ON) the memory bit specified in [F0].
BSET
F0 0 1

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Example
• $u100 - 08 (ON)
15 08 0
$u100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BSET

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Supplemental remarks
• If you use PLC memory or temperature controller memory that is disabled for
bit-by-bit read and write, the macro operation as the following takes place.
Ex.) Mitsubishi PLC D100-05 (ON)
1. One word that specifies the bit is read.
2. The bit specified by the above one word is set (ON).
3. The data is written to the PLC.

D100 0001 HEX

1.

2. 15 5 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
BSET
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

3.

D100 0021 HEX

* If the bit is changed in a sequence program during processing of step 2, step 3 for data
writing is performed.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-34
 Bit Operation

BCLR F0 (OFF)

All models Function: Bit reset

This macro command is used to reset (OFF) the memory bit specified in [F0].
BCLR
F0 1 0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Example
4
• $u100 - 08 (OFF)
15 08 0
$u100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BCLR

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Supplemental remarks
• If you use PLC memory or temperature controller memory that is disabled for
bit-by-bit read and write, the macro operation as the following takes place.
Ex.) Mitsubishi PLC D100-05 (OFF)
1. One word that specifies the bit is read.
2. The bit specified by the above one word is reset (OFF).
3. The data is written to the PLC.

D100 0021 HEX

1.

2. 15 5 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
BCLR
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
3.

D100 0001 HEX

* If the bit is changed in a sequence program during processing of step 2, step 3 for data
writing is performed.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-35
Bit Operation

BINV F0 (INV)

All models Function: Bit inversion

This macro command is used to invert the memory bit specified in [F0].
BINV
F0 0 1
1 0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Example
• $u100 - 08 (INV)
15 08 0
$u100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
BINV

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Supplemental remarks
• If you use PLC memory or temperature controller memory that is disabled for
bit-by-bit read and write, the macro operation as the following takes place.
Ex.) Mitsubishi PLC D100-05 (INV)
1. One word that specifies the bit is read.
2. The bit specified by the above one word is inverted.
3. The data is written to the PLC.

D100 0021 HEX

1.

2. 15 5 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
BINV
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
3.

D100 0001 HEX

* If the bit is changed in a sequence program during processing of step 2, step 3 for data
writing is performed.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-36
 Conversion

4.7 Conversion

BCD F0 = F1 (W) BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 (D) BCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Conversion to BCD
This macro command is used to convert the binary data specified in [F1] to BCD
and write the result to [F0].

WORD DWORD
F1 BIN F1+1 F1 BIN

BCD BCD
F0 BCD F0+1 F0 BCD

Available device memory 4

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
0 - 9999 0 - 99999999
F0
(BCD) (BCD)
0 - 9999 0 - 99999999
F1
(Decimal system without signs) (Decimal system without signs)

Example
• $u100 = $u200 (W) BCD

$u200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 BIN
0 0 6 4 HEX
100 DEC

BCD

$u100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BIN
0 1 0 0 HEX
100 BCD

Supplemental remarks
• If the value in [F1] is outside the permissible range, [F0] becomes “0”.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-37
Conversion

BIN F0 = F1 (W) BIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 (D) BIN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Conversion to BIN
This macro command is used to convert the BCD data specified in [F1] to binary
data and write the result to [F0].

WORD DWORD
F1 BCD F1+1 F1 BCD

BIN BIN
F0 BIN F0+1 F0 BIN

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
0 - 9999 0 - 99999999
F0
(Decimal system without signs) (Decimal system without signs)
0 - 9999 0 - 99999999
F1
(BCD) (BCD)

Example
• $u100 = $u200 (W)BIN

$u200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BIN
0 1 0 0 HEX
100 BCD

BIN

$u100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 BIN
0 0 6 4 HEX
100 DEC

Supplemental remarks
• If the value in [F1] is outside the permissible range, [F0] becomes “0”.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-38
 Conversion

CWD F0 = F1 D <-W

All models Function: Convert one-word  double-word

This macro command is used to convert the one-word data with sign specified in
[F1] to double-word data with sign and write the result to [F0].

F1

CWD

F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0 4
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
32768 - +32767
F0+1
(Decimal system with signs)
F1

Example
• $u100 = $u200 D <- W

$u200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 BIN
F F 9 C HEX
-100 DEC

CWD

$u101 $u100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 BIN

F F F F F F 9 C HEX
-100 DEC

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-39
Conversion

CVP F0 = F1 (W) PLC <-. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 (D) PLC <- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Convert binary data to PLC1-format data
This macro command is used to convert the binary data specified in [F1] to the
PLC1-format data and write the result to [F0].
The following PLCs manipulate PLC-format data.
• Fuji Electric: MICREX-F all types
• Yaskawa: Memobus [Transmission Mode: Type 1]
• OMRON: All [Transmission Mode: Transmission Mode 2]

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
• The available memory address range and the type of data vary, depending on
the PLCs. Refer to the PLC manual for details.

Example
• Fuji MICREX-F F70S BCD with signs (7999 to +7999)
The most significant bit
OFF: Positive
ON: Negative
$u100 = $u200 (W) PLC<-

$u200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 BIN
F F 9 C HEX
-100 V series (DEC)
CVP 
$u100 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BIN
8 1 0 0 HEX
-100 F70S (BCD with signs)

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is used in combination with MOV or BMOV.
• To convert to characteristic data other than for PLC1, use “ CVPFMT” (page 4-
41).
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-40
 Conversion

CVPFMT F0 = F1 (W) PLC F2 <- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 (D) PLC F2 <- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Convert binary data to PLC-format data specified at [F2]
This macro command is used to convert the binary data specified in [F1] to the
PLC-format data specified at [F2] and write the result to [F0].
The following PLCs manipulate PLC-format data.
• Fuji Electric: MICREX-F all types
• Yaskawa: Memobus [Transmission Mode: Type 1]
• OMRON: All [Transmission Mode: Transmission Mode 2]

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0 4
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 The available memory address range and the type of data vary,
depending on the PLCs.
F1 Refer to the PLC manual for details.

F2 1-8

Example
• Fuji’s MICREX-F series is connected as PLC2.
• Fuji MICREX-F F70S BCD with signs (-7999 to +7999)
The most significant bit
OFF: Positive
ON: Negative
$u100 = $u200 (W) PLC2 <-

$u200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 BIN
F F 9 C HEX
-100 V series (DEC)
CVPFMT 
$u100 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BIN
8 1 0 0 HEX
-100 F70S (BCD with signs)

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is used in combination with MOV or BMOV.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-41
Conversion

CVB F0 = F1 (W) <- PLC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 (D) <- PLC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Convert PLC1-format data to binary data
This macro command is used to convert the PLC1-format data specified in [F1] to
binary data and write the result to [F0].
The following PLCs manipulate PLC-format data.
• Fuji Electric: MICREX-F all types
• Yaskawa: Memobus [Transmission Mode: Type 1]
• OMRON: All [Transmission Mode: Transmission Mode 2]

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
• The available memory address range and the type of data vary, depending on
the PLCs. Refer to the PLC manual for details.

Example
• Fuji MICREX-F F70S BCD with signs (7999 to +7999)
The most significant bit
OFF: Positive
ON: Negative
$u100 = $u200 (W) <-PLC

$u200 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 BIN
8 0 0 1 HEX
-1 F70S (BCD with signs)
CVB 
$u100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BIN
F F F F HEX
-1 V series (DEC)

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is used in combination with MOV or BMOV.
• To convert to characteristic data other than for PLC1, use “ CVBFMT” (page 4-
43).
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-42
 Conversion

CVBFMT F0 = F1 (W) <- PLC F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 (D) <- PLC F2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Convert PLC-format data specified at [F2] to binary data
This macro command is used to convert the PLC-format data specified at [F2] in
[F1] to the binary data and write the result to [F0].
The following PLCs manipulate PLC-format data.
• Fuji Electric: MICREX-F all types
• Yaskawa: Memobus [Transmission Mode: Type 1]
• OMRON: All [Transmission Mode: Transmission Mode 2]

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0 4
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 The available memory address range and the type of data vary,
depending on the PLCs.
F1 Refer to the PLC manual for details.

F2 1-8

Example
• Fuji’s MICREX-F series is connected as PLC2.
• Fuji MICREX-F F70S BCD with signs (-7999 to +7999)
The most significant bit
OFF: Positive
ON: Negative
$u100 = $u200 (W) <- PLC2

$u200 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 BIN
8 0 0 1 HEX
-1 F70S (BCD with signs)
CVBFMT 
$u100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 BIN
F F F F HEX
-1 V series (DEC)

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is used in combination with MOV or BMOV.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-43
Conversion

SWAP F0 = C : F1 (SWAP)

All models Function: Swap MSB with LSB

This macro command is used to perform a swap between the higher-order byte
and the lower-order byte of the data at the location starting from the address
specified in [F0]. The data count is specified in [F1].

F0 8bit 8bit 1 8bit 8bit

F0+1 8bit 8bit 2 8bit 8bit

F0+2 8bit 8bit 3 8bit 8bit

SWAP
: : : :
8bit 8bit F1 8bit 8bit

Swap

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
0000 - FFFF
F0
(HEX)
F1 0 - 1024

Example
• $u100 C : 2 (SWAP)

$u100 F 0 5 7 HEX 5 7 F 0 HEX

$u101 A 4 9 F HEX SWAP 9 F A 4 HEX

Swap

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-44
 Conversion

CHR F0 = ’ ’

All models Function: Convert text  code

This macro command is used to convert the text placed in quotation marks ’ ’ to
the shifted JIS/ASCII codes and write the result to [F0].
Text

CHR
F0 Shifted JIS/ASCII
F0+1 Shifted JIS/ASCII
: Shifted JIS/ASCII

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
memory memory
Memory card Constant
4
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 82 bytes maximum
F0+1 Shifted JIS/ASCII Variable depending on the bytes
: of the text

’’ Text 80 bytes maximum

Example
• When [MSB  LSB] is selected for [Text Process] on the [Communication
Setting] tab window.
$u100 = string
Text string
CHR
$u100 7 3 7 4 HEX ts
$u101 7 2 6 9 HEX ir
$u102 6 E 6 7 HEX gn
$u103 0 0 0 0 HEX Null code

Supplemental remarks
• Swap between the higher-order byte and the lower-order byte can be set by
selecting an option for [Text Process] under [Communication Setting].
• Regardless of the setting above, use a “ STRING” command (page 4-46) for
[LSB  MSB] conversions.
• A null code is added to the end. Even-number-byte text thereby uses one
extra word.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-45
Conversion

STRING F0 = ’ ’(STRING)

All models Function: Convert text  code

This macro command is used to convert the text placed in quotation marks ’ ’ to
the shifted JIS/ASCII codes and write the result to [F0].

Text

STRING
F0 Shifted JIS/ASCII
F0+1 Shifted JIS/ASCII
: Shifted JIS/ASCII

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 128 bytes maximum
F0+1 Shifted JIS/ASCII Variable depending on the bytes
: of the text

‘ ’ Text 128 bytes maximum

Example
$u100 = string

Text string
CHR
$u100 7 4 7 3 HEX ts
$u101 6 9 7 2 HEX ir
$u102 6 7 6 E HEX gn
$u103 0 0 0 0 HEX Null code

Supplemental remarks
• Regardless of the [Text Process] setting under [Communication Setting] for
PLC1, the data is stored in memory in the [LSB  MSB] sequence.
• A null code is added to the end. Even-number-byte text thereby uses one
extra word.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-46
 Conversion

CVFD F0(D) <- F1 (F) F2 (D)

All models Function: Convert floating decimal point  32-bit binary

This macro command is used to convert the 32-bit single precision real number
specified in [F1] to 32-bit binary data and store the result in [F0].
[F2] specifies the exponent of “10” at the time of conversion.
If [F2] = 0, rounding to the nearest whole number* is performed. If [F2] = 1,
rounding to the nearest tenth* is performed. The result is stored in [F0].
* Rounding down and rounding up are also possible. Refer to page 4-48.

F1 31 30 29 - 24 23 22 21 - 5 4 3 2 1 0 Real
Sign Exponent Mantissa number

0 < Exponent < 255 : (-1)Sign(1 + Mantissa  2-23)  2(Exponent - 127)

Exponent = 0, Mantissa  0 : (-1)Sign(Mantissa  2-23)  2-126
Exponent = 0, Mantissa = 0
Sign = 0, Exponent = 255,
Mantissa = 0
:

:
0


4
Sign = 1, Exponent = 255,
: -
Mantissa = 0
Exponent = 255, Mantissa  0 : NaN
CVFD 
F0 31 30 29 - 5 4 3 2 1 0
BIN
231 230 229 - 25 24 23 22 21 20

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 2147483648 - 2147483647 (BIN)
F1 IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F2 32 - +32

Example
• $u100 (D) <- $u200 (F) 0 (D)

$u201,$u200 31 30 29 - 24 23 22 21 - 2 1 0
0 127 4194304
Sign Exponent Mantissa
(-1)0  (1 + 4194304 2-23)  2 (127-127) = 1.5
CVFD 
$u101,$u100 31 30 29 - 2 1 0
0 0 0 - 0 1 0
2DEC

4-47
Conversion

• $u100 (D) <- $u200 (F) 1 (D)

$u201,$u200 31 30 29 - 24 23 22 21 - 2 1 0
0 127 4194304
Sign Exponent Mantissa
0 -23
(-1)  (1 + 4194304 2 )  2 (127 - 127) = 1.5
CVFD 
$u101,$u100 31 30 29 - 2 1 0
0 0 0 - 1 1 1
15DEC

Supplemental remarks
• You can select whether to round to the nearest whole number, round down or
round up by specifying the appropriate value for $s99.*
Setting Operation
Round to the
0 - 4 : Round down
Other than 1 or 2 nearest whole
5 - 9 : Round up
number
1 Round down
0: Round down
2 Round up
Other than 0: Round up

* If [Retain compatibility with negative value handling of CVFD macro command] is

checked in the [General Settings] tab window ([System Setting]  [Unit Setting] 
[General Settings]), the action to round down is performed, irrespective of the value in
memory at $s99.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-48
 Conversion

CVDF F0(F) <- F1 (D) F2 (D)

All models Function: Convert 32-bit binary  floating decimal point

This macro command is used to convert the 32-bit binary data specified in [F1] to
32-bit single precision real number and store the result in [F0].
[F2] specifies the exponent of “10” at the time of conversion.

F1 31 30 29 - 5 4 3 2 1 0

231 230 229 - 25 24 23 22 21 20 BIN

CVDF 
F0 31 30 29 - 24 23 22 21 - 5 4 3 2 1 0
Sign Exponent Mantissa Real
number
0 < Exponent < 255 : Sign -23 (Exponent - 127)
(-1)  (1 + Mantissa  2 )2
Exponent = 0, Mantissa  0 : (-1)Sign  (Mantissa  2-23)  2 -126
Exponent = 0, Mantissa = 0
Sign = 0, Exponent = 255,
: 0


4
:
Mantissa = 0
Sign = 1, Exponent = 255,
: -
Mantissa = 0
Exponent = 255, Mantissa  0 : NaN

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1 2147483648 - 2147483647 (BIN)
F2 32 - +32

Example
• $u100 (F) <- $u200 (D) 0 (D)

$u201,$u200 31 30 29 - 2 1 0
00000001BIN BIN
CVDF 
$u101,$u100 31 30 29 - 24 23 22 21 - 2 1 0
0 127 0
Sign Exponent Mantissa Real
number
(-1)0  (1 + 0  2-23)  2 (127 - 127) = 1

4-49
Conversion

• $u100 (F) <- $u200 (D) 1 (D)

$u201,$u200 31 30 29 - 2 1 0
00000001BIN BIN
CVDF 
$u101,$u100 31 30 29 - 24 23 22 21 - 2 1 0
0 130 2097152
Sign Exponent Mantissa Real
number
(-1)0  (1 + 2097152  2-23)  2 (130 - 127) = 10

Supplemental remarks
The V series manipulates 32-bit single precision real numbers. Therefore, in the
case of 24-bit binary data that exceeds the significant digit (16777216 to
16777215 in the decimal system), the figure at the 25th bit from the leftmost digit
of the converted binary data is rounded up and the figures at the 26th bit and after
are truncated. Since the value obtained in the above manner is used for
conversion to real number, an error is introduced.

F1 31 30 - 26 25 24 23 - 3 2 1 0
0 0 - 0 1 0 0 - 0 1 1 1
33554439 DEC
Because the effective digit is exceeded, the figure at the 25th bit
from the leftmost digit of the converted binary data is rounded up.
0 0 - 0 1 0 0 - 0 1 1 1
 24 bits   Rounding up
33554440 DEC
CVDF 
F0 33554440 Real number

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-50
 Conversion

CLND_TO_GRE CLND_TO_GRE F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Convert calendar data  GMT-based UNIX time

This macro is used to convert the calendar data [F1] in format [F2] to the UNIX
time based on GMT, and to store the converted result in [F0].

F1 Calendar data F0 GMT-based UNIX time

CLND_TO_GRE

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1 4
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Time data 0 DEC only
Time data 1 Time data 0
F0+1 Time data 1
GMT-based UNIX time from January 1, 1970

F1 4 or 2 digits: Year
F1+1 1 - 12: Month
F1+2 1 - 31: Day
F1+3 0 - 23: Hour
F1+4 0 - 59: Minute
F1+5 0 - 59: Second
Data format for [F1]
F2 0: DEC
1: BCD

: V series (return data)

Example
The calendar data in $u200 - $u205 in DEC format, 17 (hour):25 (minutes):10
(seconds) on June 10 in 2010, is converted to the GMT-based UNIX time, and the
converted result is stored in $u100 and $u101.
$u200 = 2010 (W)
$u201 = 6 (W)
$u202 = 10 (W)
$u203 = 17 (W)
$u204 = 25 (W)
$u205 = 10 (W)
$u300 = 0 (W)
CLND_TO_GRE $u100 $u200 $u300
The GMT-based UNIX time “1276190710 seconds” is obtained.
Time data 0  $u100 = 8182 DEC
Time data 1  $u101 = 19473 DEC

4-51
Conversion

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

Restrictions
• When setting a numerical data display to show the converted result of
calendar data, 3 (hour):14 (minutes):7 (seconds) on January 19, 2038 or after,
enable the display to show 2-word long data without sign.
• This macro handles any year divisible by 4 as a leap year. For example, the
year 2100 is recognized as a leap year though it is not so. Therefore, an error
of one day will result.
• The calendar data displayable on the V9 unit ranges from January 1, 2012 to
January 19, 2038. Any data outside this range cannot be converted with this
macro correctly.

4-52
 Conversion

GRE_TO_CLND GRE_TO_CLND F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Convert GMT-based UNIX time  calendar data

This macro is used to convert the UNIX time based on GMT in [F1] to the calendar
data in format [F2], and to store the converted result in [F0].

F1 GMT-based UNIX time F0 Calendar data

GRE_TO_CLND

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
4
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 4 digits: Year
F0+1 1 - 12: Month
F0+2 1 - 31: Day
F0+3 0 - 23: Hour
F0+4 0 - 59: Minute
F0+5 0 - 59: Second
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
F0+6 3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
F1 Time data 0 DEC only
Time data 1 Time data 0
F1+1 Time data 1
GMT-based UNIX time from January 1, 1970

Data format for [F0]

F2 0: DEC
1: BCD

: V series (return data)

4-53
Conversion

Example
The GMT-based UNIX time, 1278663500 seconds, in $u200 is converted to the
calendar data in DEC format, and the converted result is stored in $u100 and after.
GRE_TO_CLND $u100 $u200 0
The calendar data, “8 (hour):18 (minutes):20 (seconds) on Friday on July 9, 2010,”
is obtained.
Year  $u100 = 2010 DEC
Month  $u101 = 7 DEC
Day  $u102 = 9 DEC
Hour  $u103 = 8 DEC
Minutes  $u104 = 18 DEC
Seconds  $u105 = 20 DEC
Day of the week  $u106 = 5 DEC

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

Restrictions
• This macro handles any year divisible by 4 as a leap year. For example, the
year 2100 is recognized as a leap year though it is not so. Therefore, an error
of one day will result.
• The calendar data displayable on the V9 unit ranges from January 1, 2012 to
January 19, 2038. Any data outside this range cannot be converted with this
macro correctly.

4-54
 Conversion

FORMAT_DATA FORMAT_DATA F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Convert string  numerical data

This macro is used to convert the string [F1] according to the attributes [F2], and to
store the converted result in [F0].

F1 String (JIS/ASCII) F0 Numerical data

FORMAT_DATA

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1 4
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 Target memory: BIN data The number of words depends on [F2+1] (data length).
The number of bytes depends on [F2+3] (character
count).
F1 Source memory: String (ASCII code)
32 bytes maximum (16 words)
Character processing LSB  MSB fixed
0: DEC without sign (decimal) Format for [F1]
1: DEC with a negative sign If “DEC with a negative sign” or “FLOAT” is selected for
(decimal) [F2] for the conversion of a positive value, add a space
2: DEC with a positive/negative sign code (20H) to the leftmost position of the positive value.
F2 (decimal) Otherwise, an error will result.
3: HEX (hexadecimal) A space code is not included in the number of digits.
4: OCT (octal) Example:
5: BIN (binary) For a string “123” to be converted, add a space to make it
6: FLOAT (real number) as “ 123”.
0: 1 word Data length for [F0]
F2+1
1: 2 words If “FLOAT” is selected for [F2], specify “0”.
Data format for [F0]
0: DEC
F2+2 If “HEX,” “OCT,” “BIN,” or “FLOAT” is selected for [F2],
1: BCD
specify “0”.
Number of digits for [F1]
A positive/negative sign and a decimal point are not
1 - 32: [F2] = 0, 1, 2, 5, or 6
included in the number of digits.
F2+3 1 - 8: [F2] = 3
Example:
1 - 11: [F2] = 4
For a string “12.3” to be converted, the number of digits
is three.
Decimal place for [F1]
0 - 10: [F2] = 0, 1, or 2 Example:
F2+4
0 - 31: [F2] = 6 For a string “12.34” to be converted, specify two decimal
places.
0: With zero suppress
F2+5 Format for [F1]
1: Without zero suppress

4-55
Conversion

Value Remarks
Format for [F1]
When a value in [F1] includes leading spaces, specify “0”.
Valid only when F2+5 = 0 When a value in [F1] includes trailing spaces, specify “1”.
F2+6 0: Leading spaces removed Example:
1: Trailing spaces removed 0: 12 12
1: 12 12

F2+7 0 fixed

Example
The string in $u100 is converted to the numerical data, and the converted result is
stored in $u300.
• String “1234”: DEC without sign

Display
$u100 3 2 3 1 HEX “12”
$u101 3 4 3 3 HEX “34”

FORMAT_DATA

$u300 1234 “1234”

$u00100 = ‘1234’ (STRING)

$u00200 = 0 (W) [DEC without sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 4 (W) [4 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces removed]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_DATA $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234” is stored in $u300.

• String “12.34”: A positive value in DEC with a negative sign format and with
two decimal places
$u00100 = ‘ 12.34’ (STRING)
; (For a positive value, add a space code 20H to the leftmost position.)
$u00200 = 1 (W) [DEC with a negative sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 4 (W) [4 digits]
$u00204 = 2 (W) [Two decimal places]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces removed]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_DATA $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234” is stored in $u300.

4-56
 Conversion

• String “12.34”: A negative value in DEC with a negative sign format and with
two decimal places
$u00100 = ‘12.34’ (STRING)
$u00200 = 1 (W) [DEC with a negative sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 4 (W) [4 digits]
$u00204 = 2 (W) [Two decimal places]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces removed]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_DATA $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234” is stored in $u300.

• String “1234”: FLOAT

$u00100 = ‘ 1234’ (STRING) 4
;(For a positive value, add a space code 20H to the leftmost position.)
$u00200 = 6 (W) [FLOAT]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
$u00203 = 4 (W) [4 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces removed]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_DATA $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234” is stored in $u300 and $u301.

• String “001234”: DEC without sign format and without zero suppress
$u00100 = ‘001234’ (STRING)
$u00200 = 0 (W) [DEC without sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 6 (W) [6 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 1 (W) [Without zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces removed]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_DATA $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234” is stored in $u300.

• String “ 1234”: DEC without sign format and with two leading spaces
$u00100 = ‘ 1234’ (STRING)
$u00200 = 0 (W) [DEC without sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 6 (W) [6 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces removed]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_DATA $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234” is stored in $u300.

4-57
Conversion

• String “1234 ”: DEC without sign format and with two trailing spaces
$u00100 = ‘1234 ’ (STRING)
$u00200 = 0 (W) [DEC without sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 6 (W) [6 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 1 (W) [Trailing spaces removed]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_DATA $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234” is stored in $u300.

Supplemental remarks
• If “HEX” is specified as an attribute for conversion, characters “A” - “F” of the
source data is not case-sensitive.
• If this macro, with “FLOAT” specified as an attribute, results in underflow, “0” is
obtained as the converted result.
• Conversion with this macro is in the order of LSB  MSB.
• The following PLCs provided with PLC-specific data format are capable of
handling negative values in BCD with a sign format. When you run this macro
using such a value with any of these PLCs, the internal memory is not valid for
[F0]. Therefore, be sure to assign the PLC memory (specific to the PLC
model) to [F0].
- Fuji Electric: All of the MICREX-F series
- Yaskawa: Memobus [Trans. Mode: Type 1]
- Omron: All [Transmission Mode 2]
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-58
 Conversion

FORMAT_STR FORMAT_STR F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Convert numerical data  string

This macro is used to convert the numerical data [F1] according to the attributes
[F2], and to store the converted result in [F0].

F1 Numerical F0 String (JIS/ASCII)

FORMAT_STR

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1 4
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
The number of bytes depends on [F2+3] (character
Target device memory: String (ASCII count).
F0
code) 32 bytes maximum (16 words)
Character processing LSB  MSB fixed
F1 Source device memory: BIN data The number of words depends on [F2+1] (data length).
0: DEC without sign (decimal)
Format for [F1]
1: DEC with a negative sign
If “DEC with a negative sign” or “FLOAT” is selected for
(decimal)
[F2] and the converted result is a positive value, a space
2: DEC with a positive/negative sign
code (20H) is added to the leftmost position of the
F2 (decimal)
positive value.
3: HEX (hexadecimal)
Example:
4: OCT (octal)
For numerical data “123” to be converted, a space is
5: BIN (binary)
added to provide a converted result as “ 123”.
6: FLOAT (real number)
0: 1 word Data length for [F1]
F2+1
1: 2 words If “FLOAT” is selected for [F2], specify “0”.
Data format for [F1]
0: DEC
F2+2 If “HEX,” “OCT,” “BIN,” or “FLOAT” is selected for [F2],
1: BCD
specify “0”.
Number of digits for [F0]
A positive/negative sign and a decimal point are not
included in the number of digits.
1 - 32: [F2] = 0, 1, 2, 5, or 6 If the number of digits specified for [F2+3] is smaller than
F2+3 1 - 8: [F2] = 3 that of the converted string, the result is given as a
1 - 11: [F2] = 4 hyphen “-”.
Example:
For a string “-12.3” as the converted result, the number of
digits is three.
Decimal place for [F0]
0 - 10: [F2] = 0, 1, or 2 Example:
F2+4
0 - 31: [F2] = 6 For a string “12.34” as the converted result, the number
of digits is four and two decimal places are given.

4-59
Conversion

Value Remarks
Format for [F0]
0: With zero suppress Select whether to execute zero suppress.
F2+5
1: Without zero suppress Example:
For a string “00012” as the converted result, specify “1”.
Format for [F0]
When a value in [F0] includes leading spaces, specify “0”.
Valid only when F2+5 = 0 When a value in [F1] includes trailing spaces, specify “1”.
F2+6 0: Leading spaces added Example:
1: Trailing spaces added 0: 12  12
1: 12 12

F2+7 0 fixed

Example
The numerical data in $u100 is converted to a string according to the specified
attributes, and the converted result is stored in $u300.
• Numerical data “1234”: DEC without sign
Display
$u100 1234 “1234”

FORMAT_STR

$u300 3 2 3 1 HEX “12”

$u301 3 4 3 3 HEX “34”

$u00100 = 1234 (W)

$u00200 = 0 (W) [DEC without sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 4 (W) [4 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces added]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_STR $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234” is stored in $u300 and $u301.

• Numerical data “1234”: DEC without sign format and with zero suppress and
leading spaces
$u00100 = 1234 (W)
$u00200 = 0 (W) [DEC without sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 6 (W) [6 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces added]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_STR $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “ 1234” is stored in $u300 to $u302.

4-60
 Conversion

• Numerical data “1234”: DEC without sign format and with zero suppress and
trailing spaces
$u00100 = 1234 (W)
$u00200 = 0 (W) [DEC without sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 6 (W) [6 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 1 (W) [Trailing spaces added]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_STR $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “1234 ” is stored in $u300 to $u302.

• Numerical data “1234”: DEC without sign format and without zero suppress
$u00100 = 1234 (W)
$u00200 = 0 (W) [DEC without sign]
4
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 6 (W) [6 digits]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [Without decimal point]
$u00205 = 1 (W) [Without zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces added]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_STR $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “001234” is stored in $u300 to $u302.

• Numerical data “12.34”: DEC with a negative sign format and with two decimal
places
$u00100 = 1234 (W)
$u00200 = 1 (W) [DEC with a negative sign]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [1 word]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [DEC]
$u00203 = 4 (W) [4 digits]
$u00204 = 2 (W) [Two decimal places]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces added]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_STR $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “ 12.34” is stored in $u300 to $u302.
(For a positive value, a space code 20H is added to the leftmost position.)

• Numerical data “1234.00”: FLOAT

$u00100 = 1234 (D)
$u00100(F) <- $u00100(D) 0 (D)
$u00200 = 6 (W) [FLOAT]
$u00201 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
$u00202 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
$u00203 = 6 (W) [6 digits]
$u00204 = 2 (W) [Two decimal places]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [With zero suppress]
$u00206 = 0 (W) [Leading spaces added]
$u00207 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
FORMAT_STR $u00300 $u00100 $u00200
The result “ 1234.00” is stored in $u300 to $u303.
(For a positive value, a space code 20H is added to the leftmost position.)

4-61
Conversion

Supplemental remarks
• Conversion with this macro is in the order of LSB  MSB.
• A NULL code is added to the end of the string as a result of conversion. Even-
number-byte string thereby uses one extra word.
• The following PLCs provided with PLC-specific data format are capable of
handling negative values in BCD with a sign format. When you run this macro
using such a value with any of these PLCs, the internal memory is not valid for
[F1]. Therefore, be sure to assign the PLC memory (specific to the PLC
model) to [F1].
- Fuji Electric: All of the MICREX-F series
- Yaskawa: Memobus [Trans. Mode: Type 1]
- Omron: All [Transmission Mode 2]
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-62
 Transfer

4.8 Transfer

MOV F0 = F1 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 (D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Transfer
This macro command is used to transfer the data at the address specified in [F1]
to the address in [F0].

WORD DWORD
F1 F0 F1+1 F1 F0+1 F0
MOV MOV

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
4
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1 (HEX) (HEX)

Example
• $u100 = PLC1 [D200] (W)

D200 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BIN
0 1 0 0 HEX
MOV

$u100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BIN
0 1 0 0 HEX

• $u100 = PLC1 [D200] (D)

D201 D200 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 BIN

F F F F F F 9 C HEX

MOV

$u101 $u100 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 BIN

F F F F F F 9 C HEX

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-63
Transfer

BMOV F0 = F1 C : F2 (BMOV)(W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 C : F2 (BMOV)(D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Block transfer
This macro command is used to transfer the data at the location starting from the
address specified in [F1] in a block to the top address in [F0]. The data count is
specified in [F2].
WORD
1 F1 F0
2 F1+1 F0+1
3 F1+2 F0+2
BMOV
: : :
F2 F1+(F2-1) F0+(F2-1)

DWORD

1 F1 1 F0 1 F1 1 F0
2 F1+1 2 F0+1
3 F1+2 2 F0+1 2 F1+1 3 F0+2
BMOV BMOV
: : : : : : : :
F2 F1+(F2-1) F2/2 F0+(F2/2) F2/2 F1+(F2/2-1) F2 F0+(F2-1)
Internal device Double-word Double-word Internal device
memory device memory device memory memory

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1 (HEX) (HEX)
F2 0 - 4096 0 - 4096

Example
• $u100 = PLC1 [D200] C : 3 (BMOV) (W)

D200 2222 HEX $u100 2222 HEX

D201 1111 HEX BMOV $u101 1111 HEX
D202 4444 HEX $u102 4444 HEX

4-64
 Transfer

• PLC2 [1:#C100] = $u100 C : 4 (BMOV) (D) or

PLC2 [1:#C100] = $u100 C : 3 (BMOV) (D)

$u100 2222 HEX 1:#C100 11112222 HEX

BMOV
$u101 1111 HEX
$u102 5555 HEX 1:#C101 77775555 HEX
$u103 7777 HEX
Internal device memory Double-word device memory

• $u100 = PLC2 [1:#C100] C : 4 (BMOV) (D) or

$u100 = PLC2 [1:#C100] C : 3 (BMOV) (D)

1:#C100 11112222 HEX $u100 2222 HEX

BMOV
$u101 1111 HEX

4
1:#C101 77775555 HEX $u102 5555 HEX
$u103 7777 HEX
Double-word device memory Internal device memory

Supplemental remarks
• If [ Permit Double-Word Transfer by BMOV] is not checked on the [General
Settings] tab window ([System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [General Settings]),
DWORD cannot be selected.
If BMOV in double-word device memory is executed though the option is not
checked, the following results:

PLC2 [1:#C100] = $u100 C : 4 (BMOV)

$u100 2222 HEX 1:#C100 00002222 HEX

BMOV
$u101 1111 HEX 1:#C101 00001111 HEX
$u102 5555 HEX 1:#C102 00005555 HEX
$u103 7777 HEX 1:#C103 00007777 HEX

$u100 = PLC2 [1:#C100] C : 4 (BMOV)

1:#C100 11112222 HEX $u100 2222 HEX

BMOV
1:#C101 77775555 HEX $u101 5555 HEX
1:#C102 88884444 HEX $u102 4444 HEX
1:#C103 99993333 HEX $u103 3333 HEX
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-65
Transfer

CVMOV F0 = F1 C : F2 (CVMOV)(W). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 C : F2 (CVMOV)(D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Block transfer
This macro command is used to transfer the data at the location starting from the
address specified in [F1] in a block to the top address in [F0]. The data count is
specified in [F2]. Depending on the PLC models, data conversion takes place at
the same time.

WORD
1 F1 F0
2 F1+1 F0+1
3 F1+2 F0+2
CVMOV
: : :
F2 F1+(F2-1) F0+(F2-1)

DWORD

1 F1 1 F0 1 F1 1 F0
2 F1+1 2 F0+1
3 F1+2 2 F0+1 2 F1+1 3 F0+2
CVMOV CVMOV
: : : : : : : :
F2 F1+(F2-1) F2/2 F0+(F2/2) F2/2 F1+(F2/2-1) F2 F0+(F2-1)
Internal device Double-word Double-word Internal device
memory device memory device memory memory

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1 (HEX) (HEX)
F2 0 - 4096 0 - 4096

4-66
 Transfer

Example
Refer to the operation example applicable to your PLC model. If any PLC other
than listed blow is in use, the operation identical to the BMOV command takes
place.

Device selection Remarks Operation

Fuji Electric MICREX-F Series 2
HIDIC-S10/2S10mini
HIDIC-S10/2S10mini (Ethernet)
Hitachi HIDIC-S10/4 1
HIDIC-S10V
HIDIC-S10V (Ethernet)
[Transmission Mode:
Transmission Mode 2] in
OMRON All models 2
the [Communication

S5 PG Port*
Setting] tab window
4
S7
Siemens S7-200PPI 1
S7-300/400MPI
TI500/505
[Transmission Mode: Type
Yaskawa Memobus 1] in the [Communication 2
Setting] tab window

Device selection
Remarks Operation
(temperature controller / servo / inverter)
IAI PCON/ACON/SCON(MODBUS RTU) 1

4-67
Transfer

• Operation 1: With Hitachi’s PLC selected as PLC1

- $u100 = PLC1 [FW0064] C : 3 (CVMOV) (W)

FW64 2222 HEX $u100 2222 HEX

FW65 1111 HEX CVMOV $u101 1111 HEX
FW66 4444 HEX $u102 4444 HEX

In the case of WORD, the operation identical to BMOV takes place.

- $u100 = PLC1 [FW0064] C : 3 (CVMOV) (D) or

$u100 = PLC1 [FW0064] C : 4 (CVMOV) (D)

FW64 2222 HEX $u100 1111 HEX

Swap
FW65 1111 HEX $u101 2222 HEX
FW66 4444 HEX CVMOV $u102 3333 HEX
Swap
FW67 3333 HEX $u103 4444 HEX

In the case of DWORD, a swap between the higher-order word and the
lower-order word takes place.

• Operation 2: With Fuji’s PLC selected as PLC2

- $u100 =PLC2 [WM100] C : 3 (CVMOV) (W)
BCD (HEX) DEC (HEX)
WM100 +100 (0100) $u100 +100 (0064)
WM101 -100 (8100) CVMOV $u101 -100 (FF9C)
WM102 -1999 (9999) $u102 -1999 (F831)

BMOV CVB
DEC (HEX) DEC (HEX)
$u100 +256 (0100) $u100 +100 (0064)
$u101 -32512 (8100) $u101 -100 (FF9C)
$u102 -26215 (9999) $u102 -1999 (F831)

PLC-format data (BCD with signs) converted to binary data is stored.

- PLC2 [BD100] = $u100 C : 2 (CVMOV) (D)

DEC (HEX) BCD (HEX)

$u101 $u100 -1 (FFFFFFFF) BD100 -1 (80000001)
CVMOV

CVP BMOV
DEC (HEX) BCD (HEX)
$u101 $u100 -2147483647 (80000001) BD100 -1 (80000001)

Binary data converted to PLC-format data (BCD with signs) is stored.

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-68
 Transfer

CVSMOV F0 = F1 C : F2 (CVSMOV) (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

F0 = F1 C : F2 (CVSMOV) (D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
All models
Function: Block transfer with text process conversion
This macro command is used to transmit the data at the location starting from the
address specified in [F1] in a block to the top address in [F0]. The data count is
specified in [F2]. In transfer from the internal device memory to the PLCn device
memory, from the PLCn device memory to the internal device memory, or from
PLCm device memory to the PLCn device memory, text conversion is executed at
the same time.
1 F1 F0
2 F1+1 F0+1
3 F1+2 F0+2
CVSMOV
4
: : :
F2 F1+(F2-1) F0+(F2-1)
F2+1 NULL NULL

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 102 bytes maximum
F0+1 Text (Varies depending on the bytes of
: the text)

F1 102 bytes maximum

F1+1 Text (Varies depending on the bytes of
: the text)

F2 0 - 100 100 bytes maximum

Example
• When the [Communication Setting]  [Text Process] setting for the PLC that
is the transfer destination (PLC3) is [MSB  LSB]:
- PLC3 [D100] = $u100 C : 8 (CVSMOV) (W)

$u100 7 4 7 3 HEX ts
$u101 6 9 7 2 HEX ir
$u102 6 7 6 E HEX gn
$u103 0 0 0 0 HEX Null code
 CVSMOV
D100 7 3 7 4 HEX ts
D101 7 2 6 9 HEX ir
D102 6 E 6 7 HEX gn
D103 0 0 0 0 HEX Null code

4-69
Transfer

Supplemental remarks
• A null code is added to the end. Even-number-byte text thereby uses one
extra word.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-70
 Transfer

FILL F0 = F1 C : F2 (FILL)

All models Function: Transfer all

This macro command is used to write the data specified in [F1] to the words
starting from the address in [F0]. The number of the words is specified in [F2].

F1 F0 1
F0+1 2

F0+2 3
FILL
: :
F0+(F2-1) F2

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
4
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD
F0 0000 - FFFF
F1 (HEX)
F2 0 - 4096

Example
• $u100 = $u200 C : 3 (FILL)

$u200 20 $u100 20

$u101 20
FILL
$u102 20

Supplemental remarks
• When a PLC device memory address is specified for [F0], code conversion is
not performed.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1057.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-71
Comparison

4.9 Comparison

CMP IF (F0 condition F1) LB F2 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

IF (F0 condition F1) LB F2 (D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Comparison
This macro command is used to compare the data with signs specified in [F0] and
[F1] and to execute a jump to the label in [F2] if the comparison satisfies the
condition.

Conditions
Symbol Contents
== Equal
!= Different
< Less than
> Greater than
<= Less than or equal to
>= Greater than or equal to

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1 (HEX) (HEX)
F2 0 - 127 0 - 127

Example
• IF ($u100 == 500) LB 0 (W)
RET
LB0
:

If $u100 = 500, a jump to LB0 (label 0) takes place and then macro execution
proceeds to the next line.
If $u100  500, macro execution proceeds to the next line. In this example,
RET terminates the macro.

4-72
 Comparison

Supplemental remarks
• A label (LB) must be specified as the jump target. If no label exists, “Error: 83”
(no destination label for the jump) occurs as a result of an error check on
MONITOUCH.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1058.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-73
Comparison

TST IF condition (F0 & F1) LB F2 (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

IF condition (F0 & F1) LB F2 (D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DWORD
All models
Function: Comparison with 0
This macro command is used to compare the result of [F0] ANDed with [F1] with
“0”, and to execute a jump to the label specified in [F2] if the comparison satisfies
the condition.

Conditions
Conditions Contents
ZERO 0
NON ZERO Other than 0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD
F0 0000 - FFFF 00000000 - FFFFFFFF
F1 (HEX) (HEX)
F2 0 - 127 0 - 127

Example
• IFNZ ($u100 & 8000H) LB0 (W)
RET
LB0
:

If bit 15 at $u100 is set (ON), a jump to LB0 (label 0) takes place and then
macro execution proceeds to the next line.
If bit 15 at $u100 is reset (OFF), macro execution proceeds to the next line. In
this example, RET terminates the macro.

Supplemental remarks
• A label (LB) must be specified as the jump target. If no label exists, “Error: 83”
(no destination label for the jump) occurs as a result of an error check on
MONITOUCH.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1058.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-74
 Comparison

IF IF (F0 (condition 1) F1) (W) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WORD

ELSE IF (F0 (condition 1) F1) (D). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .DWORD
ENDIF IF (condition 2) (F0) (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BIT
(1)
All models
ELSE
(2)
ENDIF

Function: Conditional branch

For WORD or DWORD, this macro command is used to compare [F0] and [F1],
and to execute processing (1) if true, or (2) if false.
For BIT, [F0] and condition 2 is compared, and processing (1) is executed if true,
or (2) if false.
4
Processing of “ELSE” and (2) can be omitted.

Condition 1 Condition 2
Symbol Contents Symbol Contents
== Equal ZERO 0
!= Different NON ZERO Other than 0
< Less than
> Greater than
<= Less than or equal to
>= Greater than or equal to

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
WORD DWORD BIT
F0 32768 - +32767 2147483648 - +2147483647 0, 1
F1 (Decimal system with signs) (Decimal system with signs) -

Example
• For WORD comparison
IF ($u100 < 10) (W)
$u100 = $u100 + 1 (W)
ELSE
$u100 = 0 (W)
ENDIF
“$u100 = $u100 + 1” is executed when $u100 is smaller than 10. When $u100
is 10 or more, “$u100 = 0” is executed.

4-75
Comparison

• For BIT comparison

IFNZ ($u100-00) (B)
$u100 = $u100 + 1 (W)
ELSE
$u100 = 0 (W)
ENDIF
“$u100 = $u100 + 1” is executed when $u100-00 is set (ON). When $u100-00
is reset (OFF), “$u100 = 0” is executed.

Restrictions
• IF-ELSE-ENDIF commands can be nested up to 8 levels.

Supplemental remarks
• An error occurs to the macro editor when any of the following conditions is
met.
1. When IF-ELSE-ENDIF commands are nested beyond 8 levels;
Ex.: IF ($u100 > 0)
IF ($u100 < 10) There are 9 or more IF commands between
˜ IF-ENDIF commands.
:
IF ($u200 == 1)
ENDIF

2. When the number of IF commands is not the same as the one of ENDIF
commands;
Ex.: IF ($u100 == 0) There are two IF commands while there is
˜ one ENDIF command.
IF ($u100 == 0)
ENDIF

3. When the number of IF commands is not the same as the one of ELSE
commands;
Ex.: IF ($u100 == 0)
ELSE There is one IF command while there are
˜ two ELSE commands.
ELSE
ENDIF

4. When FOR and NEXT commands are specified in a series of IF-ELSE-

ENDIF commands.
Ex.: IF ($u100 == 0)
FOR 10
ELSE Only ELSE and ENDIF commands are
˜ specified between FOR and NEXT
ENDIF commands.
NEXT

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1059.

Code (DEC) Contents
0*1 Normal
1 Execution error*2

*1 Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store
the result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box
is not checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is
successfully completed. (Under development)
*2 When reading from [F0] and [F1] ends in failure, an error occurs and “1” is stored in
$s1059.
When an execution error occurs, it is regarded as a fault.

4-76
 Macro Operation Control

4.10 Macro Operation Control

CALL CALL F0

All models Function: Macro block number designation

This macro command is used to execute the macro block specified in [F0].

Macro block
No.0
No.1
No.2

CALL F0 No.n
(F0=n) Execute
4
No.1023

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 1023

Example
• CALL 5

No.0
No.1
No.2

CALL 5 No.5
Execute

No.1023

4-77
Macro Operation Control

Supplemental remarks
• If the macro block number called by CALL is not registered, an error check
triggers a warning.

• The macro command can be nested up to 8 levels.

Ex.) 2 levels

Macro block No. 2 Macro block No. 10

----------- ------------- -------------

----------- ------------- -------------
CALL 2 CALL 10 -------------
----------- ------------- -------------
----------- ------------- RET
----------- -------------
RET

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1059.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
End in error
1 (9 or more levels of macro commands are nested, an attempt is
made to execute macro commands of 160001 lines or more, etc.)

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-78
 Macro Operation Control

JMP JMP LB F0
Function: Unconditional jump
All models This macro command is used to execute a jump to the label specified in [F0].

---------
---------
---------
JMP F0
F0=n
---------
---------
---------
Not Execute
LB0 executed
-----------

4
----------
LB n
---------

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 127

Example
• JMP LB5
---------
---------
---------
JMP 5
---------
---------
--------- Not Execute
LB0 executed
-----------
----------
LB 5
---------

Supplemental remarks
• A label (LB) must be specified as the jump target. If no label exists, error 83
(there is no destination label for the jump) will be detected by error check on
MONITOUCH.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1059.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
End in error (number of executed macro lines of 160001 or greater,
1
etc.)
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-79
Macro Operation Control

LABEL LB F0:

All models Function: Label number

This macro command is used to create jump target labels for CMP, TST, and JMP.

---------
---------
---------
JMP n
F0=n
---------
---------
--------- Not Execute
LB0 executed
-----------
----------
LB F0
---------

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 127

Supplemental remarks
• A label (LB) must be specified as the jump target. If no label exists, error 83
(there is no destination label for the jump) will be detected by error check on
MONITOUCH.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1059.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
End in error (number of executed macro lines of 160001 or greater,
1
etc.)

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-80
 Macro Operation Control

FOR/NEXT FOR F0
NEXT
All models
Function: FOR - NEXT
This macro command is used to execute a loop between FOR and NEXT the
number of times specified in [F0].

FOR F0
$u300 = $u300+5  The loop executes the number
NEXT of times specified in F0.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
memory memory
Memory card Constant
4
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 65535

Example
$u300 = 0 (W)
$u301 = 0 (W)
FOR 3
$u300 = $u300 + 1 (W)

FOR $u400
If $u400 = 5, The loop is
$u301 = $u301 + 5 (W)
the loop is executed 3 times.
NEXT
executed 5 times.

NEXT

• Result
$u300 = 3
$u301 = 75

Supplemental remarks
• Loop between FOR and NEXT can be nested* up to 8 levels. Nesting beyond
8 levels triggers error 81 (macro: FOR-NEXT command number is wrong) as a
result of error check on MONITOUCH.
* Nesting means incorporating a FOR-NEXT loop into a loop of the same kind.
:
FOR 2
:
FOR 3
:
NEXT
:
NEXT
:

4-81
Macro Operation Control

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1059.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
End in error
1 (nesting of 9 or more levels / number of executed macro lines of
160001 or greater, etc.)

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-82
 Macro Operation Control

RET RET

All models Function: Macro finish

This macro command is used to finish a macro. Any lines after RET are not
executed.

$u300 = 1 (W)  Execute

$u301 = 10 (W)  Execute
RET  Finish
$u302 = 100 (W)  Not executed
$u303 = 1000 (W)  Not executed

Supplemental remarks
• In the case of a macro block called by CALL, RET executes a return to the
original sequence. 4
$u300 = 1 (W)
$u301 = 10 (W) Macro block No. 1
CALL1 $u200 = $u200 + 10 (W)
$u302 = 100 (W) RET
$u303 = 1000 (W)

4-83
Macro Operation Control

SWRET SWRET

All models Function: Execute switch function

This macro command is used in a switch ON macro.
• With SWRET:
Processing takes place in the order of ON Macro Steps of
the interruption of the macro, the execution
execution of the switch function, and
the execution of the remaining Macro A Macro A
program of the macro.
SWRET Switch function

Macro B Macro B

• Without SWRET: ON Macro Steps of

Processing takes place in the order of execution
the execution of the switch ON macro
and the execution of the switch Macro A Macro A
function.

Macro B Macro B

Switch function

Example
• In a case where a macro runs based on the result written by the ENT key (in
the entry mode) to the entry target D200, executing the switch function (for
writing) by SWRET is required.

D200 1234

7 8 9 UP
4 5 6 DW
1 2 3 +-
0 . CLR CR ON Macro
SWRET  Function: Write
IF D200>10 LB0 (W)
:

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is valid in switch ON macros.
The command, however, is not executed normally in the following cases:
- SWRET exists in a macro block called by CALL.
- JMP or FOR-NEXT triggers a movement to a label before the execution of
SWRET.
ON Macro

Macro A Macro A
JMP
SWRET Switch function
FOR - NEXT

Macro B Macro B

4-84
 Macro Operation Control

EN_INT EN_INT

All models Function: Enabling interruption of switch processing

If a switch on the V series unit is pressed during the execution of macro
processing, the switch processing is not executed immediately but is delayed until
completion of the macro sheet.
Execute
:
Switch ON
:
$u00000 = PLC1 [D00000] (W)
$u00001 = PLC2 [DM00000] (W)
$u00002 = $u00000 + $u00001 (W) (Switch processing is delayed.)
:
:
:
(End of macro sheet) 4
Execution of switch
processing

When this command is executed while switch processing is pending, macro

processing is suspended while the switch processing is executed. On completion
of the switch processing macro execution is continued from the point of
suspension.
Execute
:
Switch ON
:
$u00000 = PLC1 [D00000] (W)
$u00001 = PLC2 [DM00000] (W)
EN_INT
$u00002 = $u00000 + $u00001 (W) Execution of switch
: processing
:
(End of macro sheet)

Supplemental remarks
• If there is no switch processing pending, nothing happens in response to this
command.

4-85
FROM Backup

4.11 FROM Backup

In the FP-ROM (flash memory) for the V series screen program, its empty area
can be used to back up the PLC device memory, internal device memory, and
memory card. A maximum of 16k words can be allocated to the backup area.

FROM_WR FROM_WR F0 F1

All models Function: Write to FROM

This macro command is used to write the data of words starting from the address
specified in [F0] to the FP-ROM. The number of the words is specified in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Address in each device memory
F1 1 - 16384 (= 16k words)

Supplemental remarks
• When using the macro command, go to the [General Settings] tab window in
the [Unit Setting] dialog ([System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [General
Settings]). On the window, check [ Use Internal Flash ROM as Back-up
Area].
* Checking this option reduces the available screen program capacity by 66 kbytes.
• Each FP-ROM allows 100,000 write operations.
(Each execution of FROM_WR is counted as one time, regardless of the
number of words.) It is thereby recommended that backup data be read after
power-on and be written before power-off.
• Do not execute FROM_WR in every cycle using a CYCLE macro, etc.
• Writing to FP-ROM takes three to five seconds.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s728.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-86
 FROM Backup

FROM_RD FROM_RD F0 F1

All models Function: Read from FROM

This macro command is used to read the data of words from the FP-ROM into the
address specified in [F0]. The number of the words is specified in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)
4
Setting range
Value
F0 Address in each device memory
F1 1 - 16384 (= 16k words)

Supplemental remarks
• When using the macro command, go to the [General Settings] tab window in
the [Unit Setting] dialog ([System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [General
Settings]). On the window, check [ Use Internal Flash ROM as Back-up
Area].
* Checking this option reduces the available screen program capacity by 66 kbytes.
• Do not execute FROM_RD in every cycle using a CYCLE macro, etc.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s728.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-87
PLC

4.12 PLC

PLC_CLND PLC_CLND F0 PLC F1 F2 F3

Function: Calendar control function for PLC [F1]

All models
This macro command is used to control the calendar for the PLC specified in [F1].
Depending on the value specified in [F0] it specifies reading or writing of the
calendar data.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
0: Calendar reading *1
1: Calendar writing
F0
(specified by user) *2
2: Calendar writing (by the system) *3
F1 2 - 8: PLC number
F2 0 - 31: PLC station number Invalid with 1:1 connections
Invalid with 1:1 connections
F2+1 0 - 255: PLC sub station number Only valid for PLCs with sub
station number designations
F3 0-: Year (4-digit/2-digit)
F3+1 1 - 12: Month
F3+2 1 - 31: Day
F3+3 0 - 23: Hour
F3+4 0 - 59: Minute
F3+5 0 - 59: Second
0: Sunday
Only valid with a read ([F0] =
1: Monday
0) setting
2: Tuesday
Invalid with a write ([F0] = 1
F3+6 3: Wednesday
or 2) setting because the
4: Thursday
calculation is done internally
5: Friday
in the unit
6: Saturday
* Details of calendar function specification
*1 When [F0] = 0: Calendar reading
When the connection method specified in [F1] is “1:1”, the calendar is read
for the connected device and the information is saved in the [F3] device
memory. (The contents in the [F2] device memory are ignored.)
When the connection method specified in [F1] is “1:n”, the calendar for the
connected device with the station number specified in [F2] or the sub station
number specified in [F2+1] is read and saved in the [F3] device memory.
The V series system calendar is not changed by any command. To change
the system calendar, use “ SYS (SET_SYS_CLND) F1” (page 4-213).

4-88
 PLC

*2 When [F0] = 1: Calendar reading (specified by user)

When the connection method specified in [F1] is “1:1”, the calendar data in
the [F3] device memory is written to the connected device.
(The contents in the [F2] device memory are ignored.)
When the connection method specified in [F1] is “1:n”, the calendar data
specified in [F3] is written to the connected device with the station number
specified in [F2] or the sub station number specified in [F2+1].
*3 When [F0] = 2: Calendar reading (by the system)
When the connection method specified in [F1] is “1:1”, the V series unit’s
system calendar data is written to the connected device.
(The contents in the [F2] device memory and the [F3] device memory are
ignored.)
When the connection method specified in [F1] is “1:n”, the system’s calendar
data specified in [F3] is written to the connected device with the station
number specified in [F2] or the sub station number specified in [F2+1].
(The contents in the [F3] device memory are ignored.) 4
Example
• Setting the calendar for PLC2, station No. 1 to 20:00:00 on October 15, 2007
$u100 = 1 (W) [PLC station number: 1]
$u200 = 2007 (W)
$u201 = 10 (W)
$u202 = 15 (W) [October 15, 2007, Monday, 20:00:00]
$u203 = 20 (W)
$u204 = 0 (W)
$u205 = 0 (W)
PLC_CLND 1 PLC2 $u100 $u200
SYS (SET_SYS_CLND) $u200 (V series calendar setting)

Supplemental remarks
• If the relevant equipment doesn’t incorporate a calendar, nothing happens in
response to the command. (The V series automatically judges whether or not
the equipment incorporates a calendar.)
• Nothing happens to the equipment whose link has been dead in response to
the command.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s729.
Code (HEX) Contents
0* Normal
2004 A PLC [F1] communication error has occurred during processing.
FFFF Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-89
PLC

PLC_CTL PLC_CTL PLC F0 F1 F2

All models Function: PLC [F1] control function

This macro command is used to control the operation specified in the words
starting from the address in [F1] in relation to the PLC specified in [F0]. The
number of words is specified in [F2].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 1 - 8: PLC number
F1 0 - 31: PLC station number
F1+1 Command and others
The items to be set differ depending on the equipment. For more
: information, refer to the V9 Series Connection Manual.
F2 The number of words to be transferred

Example
• Bringing Omron’s E5ZN (station No. 1) connected to the PLC2 to a state of
RUN:
$u100 = 1 (W) [PLC station number]
$u101 = 30H (W) [Command]
$u102 = 100H (W) [Operation command (RUN)]
PLC_CTL PLC2 $u100 3

Contents F0 F1 (=$u n) =$u100 F2

n =$u100 Station number*
n+1 =$u101 Command: 0030H
0000H: Communication writing
OFF (disabled)
0001H: Communication writing ON
(enabled)
0100H: RUN
0101H: STOP
0200H: Multi-SP (Set point 0)
Operation 1-8 0201H: Multi-SP (Set point 1)
0202H: Multi-SP (Set point 2) 3
command (PLC1 - 8)
n+2 =$u102 0203H: Multi-SP (Set point 3)
0300H: AT cancel
0301H: AT execution
0400H: Write mode (Backup)
0401H: Write mode (RAM)
0500H: Save RAM data
0600H: Software reset
0700H: Move to set area 1
0800H: Move to protect level

* 8000 (HEX): broadcasting

4-90
 PLC

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s729.

Code (HEX) Contents
0* Normal
2002 Memory cannot be allocated.
2004 A PLC [F0] communication error has occurred during processing.

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-91
PLC

TBL_READ TBL_READ F0 <- TABLE:PLC F1 : F2

All models Function: Read from device memory map

This macro command is used to transfer the data at the addresses registered in
the device memory map specified in [F2] of the PLC specified in [F1] to the
addresses starting with the one specified in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Top address of the target
F1 1 - 8: PLC number
F2 0 - 31: Device memory map No.

Example
• Transferring the data of the addresses registered in device memory map No. 5
defined at PLC3 to $u500 onward
TBL_READ $u500 <- TABLE : PLC3 : 5

Supplemental remarks
• As many addresses as the data count set in the device memory map must be
allocated to the target memory, to which data will be transferred.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s729.
Code (HEX) Contents
0* Normal
2001 The address set in the device memory map does not exist.
2002 The device memory cannot be allocated.
2004 A PLC [F1] communication error has occurred during processing.

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-92
 PLC

TBL_WRITE TBL_WRITE TABLE:PLC F1 : F0 <- F2

All models Function: Write to device memory map

This macro command is used to transfer the data at the location starting from the
address specified in [F2] to the address registered in the device memory map [F0]
for the PLC [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled) 4

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 31: Device memory map No.
F1 1 - 8: PLC number
F2 Top memory address of the source

Example
• Transferring the data of $u500 onward to the addresses registered in device
memory map No. 5 defined at PLC3
TBL_WRITE TABLE : PLC3 : 5 <- $u00500

Supplemental remarks
• As many addresses as the data count set in the device memory map must be
allocated to the target memory, to which data will be transferred.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s729.
Code (HEX) Contents
0* Normal
2001 The address set in the device memory map does not exist.
2002 The device memory cannot be allocated.
2004 A PLC [F1] communication error has occurred during processing.

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-93
Ethernet

4.13 Ethernet

SEND SEND F0 C:F1 TO F2

All models Function: Transfer to server

This macro command is used to transfer the data of words starting from the
address specified in [F0] to the server of the network table number in [F2]. The
number of the words is specified in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Top address of the source
F1 0 - 2000: The number of words to be transferred
F2 0 - 255: Transfer target (network table number)

Example
• SEND PLC2 [D10] C:2 TO:3
The above program transfers two words of data starting from D10 of PLC2:B
to network table No. 3 (server A).

<Server: A>

Application

Ethernet

<V series:B> SEND

D10 - D11
<PLC2:B>

Supplemental remarks
The following system devices are related to this command. For more information,
refer to the V9 Series Connection Manual.
Address Contents Remarks
$s514 The macro execution format (wait request) is set. V
$s515 The result of macro execution is stored. V

4-94
 Ethernet

EREAD EREAD F0 = F1 C:F2 F3

All models Function: Read on the network

This macro command is used to read the data of words starting from the address
specified in [F1] set in the [F3]-specified network table into the address in [F0].
The number of the words is specified in [F2].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3 4
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Top address of the target
F1 Top address of the source
F2 0 - 2000: The number of words to be transferred
F3 0 - 255: Transfer source (network table number)

Example
• EREAD PLC1 [D200] = PLC1 [D100] C:2 5
The above program reads two words of data starting from D100 of PLC2:B,
which is connected to network table No. 5 (V series:B), into D200 onward of
PLC1:A.

Ethernet

<V series:A> EREAD <V series:B>

D200 - 201 D100 - 101

<PLC1:A> <PLC1:B>

Supplemental remarks
The following system devices are related to this command. For more information,
refer to the V9 Series Connection Manual.
Address Contents Remarks
$s514 The macro execution format (wait request) is set. V
$s515 The result of macro execution is stored. V

4-95
Ethernet

EWRITE EWRITE F0 F1 = F2 C:F3

All models Function: Write on the network

This macro command is used to write data starting from the address specified in
[F2] to the address specified in [F0] of the equipment connected to the network
table number specified in [F1]. The number of words is specified in [F3].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Top address of the target
F1 0 - 255: Transfer target (network table number)
F2 Top address of the source
F3 0 - 2000: The number of words to be transferred

Example
• EWRITE PLC1 [D100] 5 = $u100 C:2
The above program writes two words of data starting from $u100 of the V
series:A to D100 onward of PLC2:B which is connected to network table No. 5
(V series:B).

Ethernet

$u100 - 101

<V series:A> EWRITE <V series:B>

D100 - 101

<PLC1:A> <PLC1:B>

Supplemental remarks
The following system devices are related to this command. For more information,
refer to the V9 Series Connection Manual.
Address Contents Remarks
$s514 The macro execution format (wait request) is set. V
$s515 The result of macro execution is stored. V

4-96
 Storage (Recipe)

4.14 Storage (Recipe)

LD_RECIPE LD_RECIPE F0 F1

All models Function: Read CSV file

This macro command is used to transfer the CSV file specified in [F1] to the
location starting from the address in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

4
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Transfer target address
F1 0000 - 9999: CSV file number

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE
File name: \RECxxxx.csv

0000 - 9999: File No.

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in the CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-97
Storage (Recipe)

Example
• LD_RECIPE $u200 1
The data in the REC0001.csv file is transferred to the location starting from
$u200.

$u200 0
Data Management
$u201 1
$u202 2
$u203 3
$u204 4
$u205 5
$u206 6
$u207 10
$u208 11
$u209 12
$u210 13
$u211 14
SD EXT0000
$u212 15
$u213 16
MEMO $u214 100
RECIPE $u215 101
REC0000.csv $u216 102
$u217 103
REC0001.csv Transfers data
$u218 104
REC0002.csv in the CSV file.
$u219 105
LOGGING $u220 106
$u221 1000
$u222 1100
$u223 1200
$u224 1300
$u225 1400
$u226 1500
$u227 1600
$u228 10000
$u229 10001
$u230 10002
$u231 10003
$u232 10004
$u233 10005
$u234 10006

Supplemental remarks
• Recipe settings are required for each CSV file.

The file “REC0001.csv” is used.

4-98
 Storage (Recipe)

• For reading text, whether to convert a null to 20H (space) or read it as “00” can
be selected.
Go to the [General Setting] tab window in the [Unit Setting] dialog ([System
Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [General Settings]). On the tab window, check or
uncheck [ Convert NULL to Space with the LD/RD Macro].

Example:

CSV file Format setting

A,B,
C,,

Execution result

Storage target Checked Unchecked

n 2041H 0041H
n+1 2042H 0042H
n+2 2043H 0043H
n+3 2020H 0000H
A null is converted to
A null remains “00”.
20H.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-99
Storage (Recipe)

LD_RECIPE2 LD_RECIPE2 F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Read CSV file (recipe number designation)

This macro command is used to transfer the CSV file number [F1] in the format of
the recipe number [F2] to the location starting from the address [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Transfer target address
F1 0000 - 9999: CSV file number
F2 0 - 255: Recipe number

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE
File name: \RECxxxx.csv

0000 - 9999: File No.

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-100
 Storage (Recipe)

Example
• LD_RECIPE2 $u100 2 0
The above program transfers the data in the file “REC0002.csv” in the format
of recipe No. 0 to the location starting from $u100.

$u100 1
Data
$u101 10
$u102 100
$u103 1000
$u104 −1
$u105 2
$u106 20
$u107 200
$u108 2000
$u109 −2
$u110
$u111
3
30
4
SD EXT0000 300
$u112
RECIPE $u113 3000
Transfers data in $u114 −3
REC0000.csv the CSV file.
$u115 4
REC0001.csv
$u116 40
REC0002.csv 400
$u117
LOGGING $u118 4000
$u119 −4
$u120 5
$u121 50
$u122 500
$u123 5000
$u124 −5

Supplemental remarks
• Recipe settings must be made in the same format as the CSV file.

Recipe No. 0

• For reading text, whether to convert a null to 20H (space) or read it as “00” can
be selected. For more information, refer to page 4-99.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-101
Storage (Recipe)

LD_RECIPESEL LD_RECIPESEL F0 F1

All models Function: Read CSV file (in units of a cell)

This macro command is used to transfer part of the CSV file specified in [F1] to the
location starting from the address in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record
F0 Transfer source address
F1 0000 - 9999: CSV file number
F1+1 1 - 32767: Top line number 1 - 4096: Top line number
F1+2 0* - 4096: Top column number 0* - 4096: Top column number
F1+3 1 - 32767: Number of lines 1 - 4096: Number of lines
F1+4 1 - 4096: Number of columns 1 - 4096: Number of columns

* Specify “0” if you wish to transfer the record name as well. In that case, select
[Record Name + Data] for [Transfer Target] under [Transfer Device Setting]
([Recipe]  [File Format]) The number of columns specified in F1+4 includes
the cell of the record name.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE
File name: \RECxxxx.csv

0000 - 9999: File No.

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-102
 Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = 1 (W) [File number 1]
$u101 = 2 (W) [Top line number]
$u102 = 3 (W) [Top column number]
$u103 = 2 (W) [Number of lines]
$u104 = 3 (W) [Number of columns]
LD_RECIPESEL $u300 $u100

The above program transfers part of the data in the REC0001.csv file to the
location starting from $u300.

$u300 12
Data Manegement
$u301 13
$u302 14
$u303
$u304
102
103
4
$u305 104

SD Transfers part of
EXT0000 the CSV file
MEMO
RECIPE Column No. (3 or above)
REC0000.csv
REC0001.csv Line No.
(2 or
REC0002.csv
above)
LOGGING

Supplemental remarks
• Attribute setting is required for each CSV file.

The file “REC0001.csv” is used.

• For reading text, whether to convert a null to 20H (space) or read it as “00” can
be selected. For more information, refer to page 4-99.

4-103
Storage (Recipe)

• Difference between reading one line and reading multiple lines

Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record

CSV file CSV file

DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
CSV
2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400

Reading one line and two Reading one line and two
columns from top line No. 2 and columns from top line No. 2 and
top column No.2 top column No.2

One DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

line 1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400

Reading two lines and two Reading two lines and two
columns from top line No. 2 and columns from top line No. 2 and
top column No. 2 top column No. 2

DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
Two
lines 2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400
* Execute reading line by line
(specifying multiple lines at
one time is not allowed).

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-104
 Storage (Recipe)

LD_RECIPESEL2 LD_RECIPESEL2 F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Read CSV file (in units of a cell/recipe No. designation)
This macro command is used to transfer a part of data in the CSV file number [F1]
in the format of the recipe number [F2] to the location starting from the address
[F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled) 4

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record
F0 Transfer target address
F1 0000 - 9999: CSV file number
F1+1 1 - 32767: Top line number 1 - 4096: Top line number
F1+2 0* - 4096: Top column number 0* - 4096: Top column number
F1+3 1 - 32767: Number of lines 1 - 4096: Number of lines
F1+4 1 - 4096: Number of columns 1 - 4096: Number of columns
F2 0 - 255: Recipe number

* Specify “0” if you wish to transfer the record name as well. In that case, select
[Record Name + Data] for [Transfer Target] under [Transfer Device Setting]
([Recipe]  [File Format]) The number of columns specified in F1+4 includes
the cell of the record name.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE
File name: \RECxxxx.csv

0000 - 9999: File number

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-105
Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = 2 (W) [File number]
$u101 = 1 (W) [Top line number]
$u102 = 1 (W) [Top column number]
$u103 = 1 (W) [Number of lines]
$u104 = 5 (W) [Number of columns]
LD_RECIPESEL2 $u500 $u100 0

The above program transfers a part of data in the file “REC0002.csv” in the
format of recipe No. 0 to the location starting from $u500.

Data

$u500 1
$u501 10
$u502 100
$u503 1000
$u504 −1

SD EXT0000
Transfers part of
MEMO
the CSV file
RECIPE
REC0000.csv
REC0001.csv
REC0002.csv
LOGGING

4-106
 Storage (Recipe)

Supplemental remarks
• Recipe settings must be made in the same format as the CSV file.

Recipe No. 0

4
• For reading text, whether to convert a null to 20H (space) or read it as “00” can
be selected. For more information, refer to page 4-99.
• Difference between reading one line and reading multiple lines

Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record

CSV file CSV file

DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
CSV
2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400

Reading one line and two Reading one line and two
columns from top line No. 2 and columns from top line No. 2 and
top column No. 2 top column No. 2

One DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

line 1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400

Reading two lines and two Reading two lines and two
columns from top line No. 2 and columns from top line No. 2 and
top column No. 2 top column No. 2

DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
Two
lines 2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400
* Execute reading line by line
(specifying multiple lines at
one time is not allowed).

4-107
Storage (Recipe)

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-108
 Storage (Recipe)

SV_RECIPE SV_RECIPE F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Save to CSV file

This macro command is used to save the data of words starting from the address
specified in [F0] to the CSV file in [F2]. The number of the words is specified in
[F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled) 4

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Transfer source address
F1 1 - 4096: Word count
F2 0000 - 9999: CSV file number

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE
File name: \RECxxxx.csv

0000 - 9999: File number

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-109
Storage (Recipe)

Example
• SV_RECIPE $u500 5 2

The above program saves the five-word data at $u500 - 504 to the
REC0002.csv file.

Data Management $u500 111

$u501 222
$u502 333
$u503 444
$u504 555

SD EXT0000
Saves the data in
the internal
MEMO device memory
RECIPE to the CSV file
REC0000.csv
REC0001.csv
REC0002.csv
LOGGING

Supplemental remarks
• Recipe settings are required for each CSV file.

The file “REC0002.csv” is used.

• If the specified CSV file does not exist in the storage, a new file will be
created. Creating the CSV file in advance is not necessary.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-110
 Storage (Recipe)

SV_RECIPE2 SV_RECIPE2 F0 F1 F2 F3

All models Function: Save to CSV file (recipe No. designation)

This macro command is used to save the data of words specified in [F1] starting
from the address [F0] to the CSV file number [F2] in the format of the recipe
number [F3].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3
4
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Transfer source address
F1 1 - 4096: Word count
F2 0000 - 9999: CSV file number
F3 0 - 255: Recipe number

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE
File name: \RECxxxx.csv

0000 - 9999: File No.

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-111
Storage (Recipe)

Example
• SV_RECIPE2 PLC1 [D400] 10 9999 0
The above program saves the ten-word data at D400 - 409 in PLC1 to the file
“REC9999.csv” in the format of recipe No. 0.

Data
D400 55
D401 66
D402 77
D403 88
D404 99
D405 1111
D406 2222
D407 3333
D408 4444
D409 5555
SD EXT0000

RECIPE Saves the data in the

REC0000.csv PLC1 device memory
to the CSV file.
REC9999.csv
LOGGING

Supplemental remarks
• Recipe settings must be made in the same format as the CSV file.

Recipe No. 0

• If the specified CSV file does not exist in the storage, a new file will be
created. Creating the CSV file in advance is not necessary.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-112
 Storage (Recipe)

SV_RECIPESEL SV_RECIPESEL F0 F1

All models Function: Save to CSV file

This macro command is used to save the data at the location starting from the
address specified in [F0] to the specified line/column in the CSV file in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record
F0 Transfer source address
F1 0000 - 9999: CSV file number
F1+1 1 - 32767: Top line number 1 - 4096: Top line number
F1+2 0* - 4096: Top column number 0* - 4096: Top column number
F1+3 1 - 4096: Number of lines 1 - 4096: Number of lines
F1+4 1 - 4096: Number of columns 1 - 4096: Number of columns

* Specify “0” if you wish to transfer the record name as well. In that case, select
[Record Name + Data] for [Transfer Target] under [Transfer Device Setting]
([Recipe]  [File Format]) The number of columns specified in F1+4 includes
the cell of the record name.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE
File name: \RECxxxx.csv

0000 - 9999: File No.

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-113
Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = 0 (W) [File number]
$u101 = 3 (W) [Top line number]
$u102 = 1 (W) [Top column number]
$u103 = 1 (W) [Number of lines]
$u104 = 2 (W) [Number of columns]
SV_RECIPESEL $u300 $u100

The above program saves the data at the location starting from $u300 to line
No. 3 in the REC0000.csv file.

Data $u300 ZY
$u301 XW
$u302 VU
$u303 TS
$u304 AB
$u305 CD
$u306 EF
$u307 GH

SD EXT0000
Saves the values in
MEMO
the device memory to
RECIPE the CSV file
REC0000.csv
LOGGING

Saves to the
specified line/
column

Supplemental remarks
• Recipe settings are required for each CSV file.

The file “REC0000.csv” is used.

4-114
 Storage (Recipe)

• If the specified CSV file does not exist in the storage, a new file will be
created. Creating the CSV file in advance is not necessary.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-115
Storage (Recipe)

SV_RECIPESEL2 SV_RECIPESEL2 F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Save to CSV file (recipe No. designation)

This macro command is used to save the data at the location starting from the
address specified in [F0] in the format of the recipe number in [F2] to the specified
line/column in the CSV file in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record
F0 Transfer source address
F1 0000 - 9999: CSV file number
F1+1 1 - 32767: Top line number 1 - 4096: Top line number
F1+2 0* - 4096: Top column number 0* - 4096: Top column number
F1+3 1 - 32767: Number of lines 1 - 4096: Number of lines
F1+4 1 - 4096: Number of columns 1 - 4096: Number of columns
F2 0 - 255: Recipe number

* Specify “0” if you wish to transfer the record name as well. In that case, select
[Record Name + Data] for [Transfer Target] under [Transfer Device Setting]
([Recipe]  [File Format]) The number of columns specified in F1+4 includes
the cell of the record name.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE
File name: \RECxxxx.csv

0000 - 9999: File No.

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-116
 Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = 9000 (W) [File number]
$u101 = 2 (W) [Top line number]
$u102 = 1 (W) [Top column number]
$u103 = 1 (W) [Number of lines]
$u104 = 5 (W) [Number of columns]
SV_RECIPESEL2 $u300 $u100 0

The above program saves the data at the location starting from $u300 in the
format of recipe No. 3 to line No. 2 in the REC9000.csv file.

Data

4
$u300 444
$u301 444
$u302 444
$u303 444
SD EXT0000 $u304 444
MEMO
RECIPE
REC0000.csv
Writes data in the device
memory to the specified
REC9000.csv location in the CSV file.
LOGGING

Saves the data to the

CSV file in the format
of the selected recipe
number.

Supplemental remarks
• Recipe settings must be made in the same format as the CSV file.
Recipe No. 0

• If the specified CSV file does not exist in the storage, a new file will be
created. Creating the CSV file in advance is not necessary.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-117
Storage (Recipe)

SET_ SET_RECIPEFOLDER F0
RECIPEFOLDER
Function: Folder designation
This macro command is used to designate the folder storing CSV files in [F0].
All models

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
F0+1 ASCII code (8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters):
F0+2 Access target folder name*
F0+3

* Text processing (LSB MSB or MSB LSB) for the folder name is
determined whether [Follow to the PLC1 setting for the text process in a recipe
file.] on the [General Settings] tab window that is displayed by [System
Setting]  [Unit Setting] is checked or not.

Follow to the PLC1 setting for the Follow to the PLC1 setting for the
text process in a recipe file. text process in a recipe file.
Text processing specified for the PLC1 Fixed to “LSB MSB”

Example
• $u100 = 4154H (W) 54 41 52 47 45 54 = TARGET
$u101 = 4752H (W) (ASCII)
$u102 = 5445H (W)
$u103 = 0000H (W)
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100

The above program specifies the folder at \(access folder)\RECIPE\TARGET.

4-118
 Storage (Recipe)

• The CHR or STRING macro command will simplify the designation of a folder
if it is a fixed name.
- (When text processing is performed according to the setting on the PLC1:
use a “CHR” command.)
$u100 = ’TARGET’
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100
- (When “LSB MSB” is selected: use a “STRING” command.)
$u100 = ‘TARGET’ (STRING)
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100

Supplemental remarks
• Four consecutive words starting from the address in [F0] are used. Be sure
that these words are not already used elsewhere.
• Once the macro command is executed, the effect is maintained until any of the
following takes place.
- Turning off the power 4
- Switching the V series from a state of RUN to STOP (Local mode)
- Removing the storage device
Execute the macro command again after any of the above or if you access a
CSV file in a different folder.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-119
Storage (Recipe)

RD_RECIPE_FILE RD_RECIPE_FILE F0 F1

All models Function: Read CSV file

This macro command is used to transfer all data in the CSV file specified in [F1] to
the address in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Transfer target
F1
F1+1 ASCII code (8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters):
F1+2 CSV file name*
F1+3

* For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on Page 4-121.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE\(arbitrary folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx.csv

8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters or less

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-120
 Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = ‘TARGET’ Not required if SET_FOLDER has
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100 already been executed
$u110 = 5250H (W)
$u111 = 444FH (W) 50 52 4F 44 55 43 54 31 = PRODUCT1
$u112 = 4355H (W) (ASCII)
$u113 = 3154H (W)
RD_RECIPE_FILE PLC1 [D200] $u110

The above program transfers all data in the PRODUCT1.csv file stored in the
TARGET folder to PLC1: D200.

Supplemental remarks
• Four consecutive words starting from the address in [F1] are used. Be sure
that these words are not already used elsewhere.
• If the CSV file specified in [F1] does not exist, a storage read error occurs
($s497 = 16).
4
• For reading text, whether to convert a null to 20H (space) or read it as “00” can
be selected. For more information, refer to page 4-99.
• Text processing (LSB MSB or MSB LSB) for the file name is determined
whether [Follow to the PLC1 setting for the text process in a recipe file.] on the
[General Settings] tab window that is displayed by [System Setting]  [Unit
Setting] is checked or not.

Follow to the PLC1 Follow to the PLC1

Device memory setting for the text setting for the text
process in a recipe file. process in a recipe file.
Internal device Text processing specified
Fixed to “LSB MSB”
memory for the PLC1
PLC 1 - 8 device Text processing specified Text processing specified
memory for the PLC1 for each PLC
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-121
Storage (Recipe)

RD_RECIPE_LINE RD_RECIPE_LINE F0 F1 F2 F3

All models Function: Read CSV file (line designation)

This macro command is used to transfer the data of specified lines in the [F1]-
specified CSV file to the address in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record
F0 Transfer target
F1
F1+1 ASCII code (8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters):
F1+2 CSV file name*
F1+3
F2 1 - 32767: Top line 1 - 4096: Top line
F3 1 - 32767: Final line 1 - 4096: Final line

* For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on page 4-121.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE\(arbitrary folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx.csv

8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters or less

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-122
 Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = ‘TARGET’ Not required if SET_FOLDER has
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100 already been executed
$u110 = 5250H (W)
$u111 = 444FH (W) 50 52 4F 44 55 43 54 31 = PRODUCT1
$u112 = 4355H (W) (ASCII)
$u113 = 3154H (W)
RD_RECIPE_LINE PLC1 [D200] $u110 3 3
The above program transfers line No. 3 (record No. 3) data in the
PRODUCT1.csv file stored in the TARGET folder to PLC1: D200.

Supplemental remarks
• Four consecutive words starting from the address in [F1] are used. Be sure
that these words are not already used elsewhere.
• If the CSV file specified in [F1] does not exist, a storage read error occurs
($s497 = 16). 4
• For reading text, whether to convert a null to 20H (space) or read it as “00” can
be selected. For more information, refer to page 4-99.
• Difference between reading one line and reading multiple lines

Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record

CSV file CSV file

DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
CSV
2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400

Reading based on top line No. 2 Reading based on top line No. 2
and final line No. 2 and final line No. 2

DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

One
1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
line
2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400

Reading based on top line No. 2 Reading based on top line No. 2
and final line No. 3 and final line No. 3

DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
Two 2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
lines 3 C 300
4 D 400
* Execute reading line by line
(specifying multiple lines at
one time is not allowed).
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-123
Storage (Recipe)

RD_RECIPE_ RD_RECIPE_COLUMN F0 F1 F2 F3
COLUMN
Function: Read CSV file (column designation)
This macro command is used to transfer the data of specified columns in the [F1]-
All models
specified CSV file to the address in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record
F0 Transfer target
F1
F1+1 ASCII code (8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters):
F1+2 CSV file name*
F1+3
0: Column of record name
F2
1 - 4096: Top column of data
0: Column of record name
F3
1 - 4096: Final column of data

* For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on page 4-121.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE\(arbitrary folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx.csv

8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters or less

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-124
 Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = ‘TARGET’ Not required if SET_FOLDER has
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100 already been executed
$u110 = 5250H (W)
$u111 = 444FH (W) 50 52 4F 44 55 43 54 31 = PRODUCT1
$u112 = 4355H (W) (ASCII)
$u113 = 3154H (W)
RD_RECIPE_COLUMN PLC1 [D300] $u110 5 5
The above program transfers column No. 5 data in the PRODUCT1.csv file
stored in the TARGET folder to PLC1: D300.

Supplemental remarks
• Four consecutive words starting from the address in [F1] are used. Be sure
that these words are not already used elsewhere.
• If the CSV file specified in [F1] does not exist, a storage read error occurs
($s497 = 16).
• For reading text, whether to convert a null to 20H (space) or read it as “00” can
4
be selected. For more information, refer to page 4-99.
• Difference between reading one column and reading multiple columns

Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record

CSV file CSV file
DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4
1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
CSV 2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400

Reading based on top column Reading based on top column

No. 2 and final column No. 2 No. 2 and final column No. 2
DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4
One 1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
line
2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
3 C 300
4 D 400

Reading based on top column Reading based on top column

No. 2 and final column No. 3 No. 2 and final column No. 3

DEC CHAR DEC DEC 1 2 3 4

1 A 100 CHAR A B C D
2 B 200 DEC 100 200 300 400
Two
3 C 300
lines
4 D 400

* Execute reading column by

column (specifying multiple
columns at one time is not
allowed).

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-125
Storage (Recipe)

WR_RECIPE_FILE WR_RECIPE_FILE F0 F1

All models Function: Save to CSV file

This macro command is used to save the data at the location starting from the
address specified in [F0] to the CSV file in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Transfer source
F1
F1+1 ASCII code (8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters):
F1+2 CSV file name*
F1+3

* For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on page 4-121.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE\(arbitrary folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx.csv

8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters or less

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-126
 Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = ‘TARGET’ Not required if SET_FOLDER has
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100 already been executed
$u110 = 5250H (W)
$u111 = 444FH (W) 50 52 4F 44 55 43 54 37 = PRODUCT7
$u112 = 4355H (W) (ASCII)
$u113 = 3754H (W)
WR_RECIPE_FILE PLC1 [D200] $u110

The above program overwrites the PRODUCT7.csv file stored in the TARGET
folder with the data at the location starting from PLC1: D200.

Supplemental remarks
• Four consecutive words starting from the address in [F1] are used. Be sure
that these words are not already used elsewhere.
• If the CSV file specified in [F1] does not exist, a storage read error occurs
4
($s497 = 16).
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-127
Storage (Recipe)

WR_RECIPE_LINE WR_RECIPE_LINE F0 F1 F2 F3

All models Function: Save to CSV file (line designation)

This macro command is used to save the data at addresses starting from the one
specified in [F0] in a specified line, or an additional final line, of the CSV file
specified in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record
F0 Transfer source
F1
F1+1 ASCII code (8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters):
F1+2 CSV file name *1
F1+3
1 - 32767: Top line
F2 1 - 4096: Top line
-1: Additional final line*2
1 - 32767: Final line
F3 1 - 4096: Final line
-1: Additional final line*2

*1 For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on page 4-121.
*2 An additional final line is only saved if “-1” is set for both F2 and F3.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE\(arbitrary folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx.csv

8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters or less

4-128
 Storage (Recipe)

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4
Example
• $u100 = ‘TARGET’ Not required if SET_FOLDER has
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100 already been executed
$u110 = 5250H (W)
$u111 = 444FH (W) 50 52 4F 44 55 43 54 37 = PRODUCT7
$u112 = 4355H (W) (ASCII)
$u113 = 3754H (W)
WD_RECIPE_LINE PLC1 [D200] $u110 3 3

The above program overwrites line No. 3 in the PRODUCT7.csv file stored in
the TARGET folder with the data at the location starting from PLC1: D200.

Supplemental remarks
• Four consecutive words starting from the address in [F1] are used. Be sure
that these words are not already used elsewhere.
• If the specified CSV file does not exist, specifying “1” or “1” for [F2] creates a
new file. If [F2]  1, a storage read error ($s497 = 16) occurs.
However, when [Line: Data, Column: Record] is selected, use
“WR_RECIPE_COLUM” to create a new file.
• When setting “1” for [F2] and [F3] and adding an additional final line, make
sure that the number of lines does not exceed 32767. The macro will not
operate correctly on files with more than 32767 lines.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-129
Storage (Recipe)

WR_RECIPE_ WR_RECIPE_COLUMN F0 F1 F2 F3
COLUMN
Function: Save to CSV file (column designation)
This macro command is used to save the data at the location starting from the
All models
address in [F0] to the specified column in the F1-specified CSV file.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Line: Record, Column: Data Line: Data, Column: Record
F0 Transfer source
F1
F1+1 ASCII code (8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters):
F1+2 CSV file name*
F1+3
0: Column of record name
F2
1 - 4096: Top column of data
0: Column of record name
F3
1 - 4096: Final column of data

* For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on page 4-121.

CSV file
Storage target: \(access folder)\RECIPE\(arbitrary folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx.csv

8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters or less

The designation of the line and column numbers in a CSV file differs, depending
on the options selected for [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]). The
 mark indicates the position of line No. 1 and column No. 1 in a CSV file.

Add title to data Add title to data

 Title
Add record

name

 - Title
Add record Record 
name Record

4-130
 Storage (Recipe)

Example
• $u100 = ‘TARGET’ Not required if SET_FOLDER has
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u100 already been executed
$u110 = 5250H (W)
$u111 = 444FH (W) 50 52 4F 44 55 43 54 37 = PRODUCT7
$u112 = 4355H (W) (ASCII)
$u113 = 3754H (W)
WR_RECIPE_COLUMN PLC1 [D300] $u110 5 5

The above program overwrites column No. 5 in the PRODUCT7.csv file stored
in the TARGET folder with the data at the location starting from PLC1: D300.

Supplemental remarks
• Four consecutive words starting from the address in [F1] are used. Be sure
that these words are not already used elsewhere.
• If the CSV file specified in [F1] does not exist, a storage read error occurs
($s497 = 16).
4
• When [Line: Data, Column: Record] is selected, a new CSV file is created by
specifying [F2] = 1.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-131
Storage (Recipe)

GET_RECIPE_ GET_RECIPE_FILEINFO F0 F1 F2
FILEINFO
Function: CSV file information
This macro command is used to store the number of lines/columns of the F1-
All models
specified CSV file in memory at the address in [F2].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
0: Number of lines
F0
1: Number of columns
0000 - 9999: CSV file number designation (RECxxxx.csv)
F1
1 (FFFFH): CSV file name designation (xxxxxxxx.csv)
F1+1
Valid if F1 = 1
F1+2
ASCII code (8 one-byte upper-case alphanumeric characters):
F1+3 CSV file name*
F1+4
F2 Information storage device memory

* For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on page 4-121.

Example
• CSV file number designation
$u100 = 0 (W) [Line]
$u200 = 1 (W) [File number]
GET_RECIPE_FILEINFO $u100 $u200 $u300

The above program stores the number of lines of the REC0001.CSV file
located in the RECIPE folder in $u300.

• CSV file name designation

$u400 = ’TEST’ Not required if SET_FOLDER has
SET_RECIPEFOLDER $u400 already been executed
$u100 = 1 (W) [Column]
$u200 = -1 (W) [File name]
$u201 = ‘SUBDATA’ [File name]
GET_RECIPE_FILEINFO $u100 $u200 $u300

The above program reads the number of columns in the file “SUBDATA.CSV”
under the TEST folder from the recipe setting and stores it in $u300.

Supplemental remarks
• When a CSV file name is specified, the next four consecutive words starting
from the address in [F1+1] are used. Be sure that these words are not already
used elsewhere.

4-132
 Storage (Recipe)

• If [Add title to data] is checked under [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File

Format]), the number of lines to be stored does not include the title line.
• If [Add record name] is checked under [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File
Format]), the number of columns to be stored does not include the column of
the record name.
• In the event of storing the number of columns with [Line: Record, Column:
Data] checked or storing the number of lines with [Line: Data, Column:
Record] checked under [Format Setting] ([Recipe]  [File Format]), the data is
stored based on the readout from the settings made under [Format Setting].
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s990.
Code (DEC) Contents
0 Normal
1 F0 parameter invalid
2 F1 parameter invalid
3
4
F2 parameter invalid
F3 parameter invalid
4
5 Error found during accessing the specified file
6 Unable to process the specified file

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-133
Storage (Sampling)

4.15 Storage (Sampling)

SMPL_BAK SMPL_BAK F0

All models Function: Save backup (bin file)

This macro command is used to make a backup file of logging or alarm data in
block No. [F0] and to save the file to the year/month/day folder in the storage.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 11: Block number

File
• Logging server
Storage target: \(access folder)\LOGGING\(year/month folder)\(year/
month/day folder)
File name: LOGGINGxx_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.bin

Output time in year, month,

00 - 11: Block number day, hour, minute, and second
• Alarm server
Storage target: \(access folder)\ALARM\(year/month folder)\(year/month/
day folder)
File name: ALARMxx_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.bin (alarm)
EVENTxx_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS.bin (event)

Output time in year, month,

00 - 11: Block number day, hour, minute, and second

Example
• SMPL_BAK 2
The above program creates a backup file for logging block 2
(LOGGING02.bin) on April 20, 2014.
SD EXT0000 SD EXT0000 (Access folder)

RECIPE RECIPE
LOGGING LOGGING
LOGGING00.bin LOGGING00.bin
LOGGING01.bin LOGGING01.bin Copy
LOGGING02.bin LOGGING02.bin
201404 (Year/month folder)
20140420 (Year/month/day folder)
LOGGING02_20140420101520.bin
LOGGIBG02_20140420143000.bin
LOGGING02_20140420204500.bin

4-134
 Storage (Sampling)

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• This macro command is valid when [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage
Output Settings] is checked in the [Output Destination] window of the logging
or alarm block.

• Data stored in SRAM is output to the storage and saved in a backup file.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-135
Storage (Sampling)

SMPL_CSV SMPL_CSV F0

Function: Create CSV file

All models
This macro command is used to convert the logging or alarm data in block No. [F0]
to the CSV file, and to save the file to the LOGGING or ALARM folder in the
storage.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 11: Block number

File
• Logging server
Storage target: \(access folder)\LOGGING
File name: \xxxxxxxx.csv

File name
• Alarm server
Storage target: \(access folder)\ALARM
File name: \xxxxxxxx.csv

File name
* Specify a file name as desired in [Form Setting] in the [Logging Block] or
[Alarm Block] window.

Example
• SMPL_CSV 1
The above program converts the data of logging block 1 to CSV format
(SMP_01.CSV) and saves the file.
With [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] unchecked:
Header
Block No. 0 SD EXT0000
Block No. 1
SRAM Block No. 2 RECIPE
LOGGING
Creates a SMP_01.csv
Memo pad CSV file.
$L/$LD

With [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] checked:

SD EXT0000 SD EXT0000

RECIPE RECIPE
LOGGING LOGGING
LOGGING00.bin LOGGING00.bin
Creates a
LOGGING01.bin CSV file. LOGGING01.bin
LOGGING02.bin LOGGING02.bin
SMP_01.csv

4-136
 Storage (Sampling)

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• When [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] is checked in
the [Output Destination] window, data stored in SRAM is output to the storage
device and saved in a CSV file.
• [Format Setting] is required for each block number.

• If the specified file already exists, it will be overwritten.

• If the block is empty, no CSV file will be created.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-137
Storage (Sampling)

SMPL_CSV2 SMPL_CSV2 F0 F1

Function: Create CSV file (file name designation)

All models
This macro command is used to convert the logging or alarm data in block No. [F0]
to the CSV file under a name specified for [F1], and to save the file to the
LOGGING or ALARM folder in the storage. If the specified file does not exist, a
new file will be created.
Available device memory
Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 11: Block number
ASCII code (64 one-byte uppercase alphanumerics at the
F1
maximum): CSV file name

File
• Logging server
Storage target: \(access folder)\LOGGING
File name: xxxxxxxx.csv
• Alarm server
Storage target: \(access folder)\ALARM
File name: xxxxxxxx.csv
Example
• The file named “SEISAN.CSV” is created from the data in logging block No. 1.
$u00100 = ‘SEISAN’ (STRING)
SMPL_CSV2 1 $u00100
File name designation
Logging block number designation

With [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] unchecked:

Header
Block No. 0 SD EXT0000
Block No. 1
SRAM
Block No. 2 RECIPE
LOGGING
Creates a SEISAN.CSV
Memo pad CSV file.
$L/$LD

With [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] checked:

SD EXT0000 SD EXT0000

RECIPE RECIPE
LOGGING LOGGING
LOGGING00.bin LOGGING00.bin
Creates a
LOGGING01.bin LOGGING01.bin
CSV file.
LOGGING02.bin LOGGING02.bin
SEISAN.CSV

4-138
 Storage (Sampling)

* If [ Insert/Overwrite together with STRING Command] is checked in the [Device

Setting] or [Macro Editing Support] dialog, the macro command STRING can also be
registered.
For more information on STRING, refer to page 4-46.

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• When [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] is checked in
the [Output Destination] window, data stored in SRAM is output to the storage
device and saved in a CSV file.
• [Format Setting] is required for each block number.

• If the specified file already exists, it will be overwritten.

• If the block is empty, no CSV file will be created.
• A full pathname can be specified for [F1].
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

Restrictions
• Symbols, [\], [/], [:], [*], [?], ["], [<], [>] and [|], cannot be used for a file name.

4-139
Storage (Sampling)

SMPL_SAVE SMPL_SAVE

All models Function: Save logging/alarm data stored in SRAM

This macro command is used to save the logging or alarm data stored in SRAM to
the storage at the desired set timing.

File
• Logging server
Storage target: \(access folder)\LOGGING
File name: \LOGGINGxx.bin

00 - 11: Block number

• Alarm server
Storage target: \(access folder)\ALARM
File name: \ALARMxx.bin

00 - 11: Block number

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• This macro command is valid when [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage
Output Settings] is checked in the [Output Destination] window of the logging
or alarm block.

• Data stored in SRAM is output to the storage and saved in a backup file.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-140
 Storage (Sampling)

SMPLCSV_BAK SMPLCSV_BAK F0

All models Function: Save backup (CSV file)

This macro command is used to convert the logging or alarm data in block No. [F0]
to the CSV file, and to save the file to the year/month/day folder in the storage.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Device Value 4
F0 0 - 11: Block number

File
• Logging server
Storage target: \(access folder)\LOGGING\(year/month folder)\(year/
month/day folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. csv

File name Output time in year, month,

day, hour, minute, and second
• Alarm server
Storage target: \(access folder)\ALARM\(year/month folder)\(year/month/
day folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. csv

File name Output time in year, month,

day, hour, minute, and second
* Specify a file name as desired in [Form Setting] in the [Logging Block] or
[Alarm Block] window.

4-141
Storage (Sampling)

Example
• SMPLCSV_BAK 1
The above program creates a CSV file for logging block 1 (LOGGING01.bin)
on April 20, 2014.
With [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] unchecked:
Header
Block No. 0 SD EXT0000
SRAM Block No. 1
Block No. 2 Creates a
CSV file. RECIPE
LOGGING
201404 (Year/month folder)
Memo pad 20140420 (Year/month/day folder)
$L/$LD SMP_01.csv

With [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] checked:

SD EXT0000 SD EXT0000

RECIPE RECIPE
LOGGING LOGGING
Creates a
LOGGING00.bin LOGGNG00.bin CSV file.
LOGGING01.bin LOGGING01.bin
LOGGING02.bin LOGGING02.bin
201404 (Year/month folder)
(Year/month/day
20140420 folder)
SMP_01_20140420101530.csv

4-142
 Storage (Sampling)

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• When [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] is checked in
the [Output Destination] window, data stored in SRAM is output to the storage
device and saved in a CSV file.
• [Format Setting] is required for each block number.

• If the block is empty, no CSV file will be created.

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-143
Storage (Sampling)

SMPLCSV_BAK2 SMPLCSV_BAK2

All models Function: Create CSV backup file (file name designation)
This macro command is used to convert the logging or alarm data in block No. [F0]
to the CSV file under a name specified for [F1], and to save the file to the year/
month/day folder in the storage.
Available device memory
Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 0 - 11: Block number
ASCII code (64 one-byte uppercase alphanumerics
F1
at the maximum): CSV file name

File
• Logging server
Storage target: \(access folder)\LOGGING\(year/month folder)\(year/
month/day folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. csv

Output time in year, month, day,

File name
hour, minute, and second
• Logging server
Storage target: \(access folder)\LOGGING\(year/month folder)\(year/
month/day folder)
File name: \xxxxxxxx_YYYYMMDDHHMMSS. csv

Output time in year, month, day,

File name
hour, minute, and second
Example
• A CSV file is created for block No. 1 backup.
April 20, 2014, file name “SEISAN.CSV”
$u00100 = ‘SEISAN’ (STRING)
SMPLCSV_BAK2 1 $u00100

File name designation

Block number designation
* If [ Insert/Overwrite together with STRING Command] is checked in the [Device
Setting] or [Macro Editing Support] dialog, the macro command STRING can also be
registered.
For more information on STRING, refer to page 4-46.

4-144
 Storage (Sampling)

With [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] unchecked:

Header
Block No. 0 SD EXT0000
SRAM Block No. 1
Block No. 2 RECIPE
LOGGING
Creates a 201404 (Year/month folder)
Memo pad CSV file. 20140420 (Year/month/day folder)
$L/$LD SEISAN_20140420153000.CSV

With [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] checked:

SD EXT0000 SD EXT0000

RECIPE RECIPE 4
LOGGING LOGGING
Creates a
LOGGING00.bin LOGGING00.bin CSV file.
LOGGING01.bin LOGGING01.bin
LOGGING02.bin LOGGING02.bin
201404 (Year/month folder)
20140420 (Year/month/day folder)
SEISAN_20140420153000.CSV

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• When [Number of Data to Save] under [Storage Output Settings] is checked in
the [Output Destination] window, data stored in SRAM is output to the storage
device and saved in a CSV file.
• The format setting must be made for each block number. (Refer to page 4-
139.)
• If the block is empty, no CSV file will be created.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

Restrictions
• Symbols, [\], [/], [:], [*], [?], ["], [<], [>] and [|], cannot be used for a file name.

4-145
Storage (Others)

4.16 Storage (Others)

HDCOPY HDCOPY

All models Function: Hardcopy

This macro command is used to save the image of the screen displayed at the
time of the macro execution to the storage.

Storage target
Storage target: \(access folder)\HDCOPY
File name: \HDxxxx.PNG

0000 - 1023: Screen number

Supplemental remarks
• One file saves one screen. If a screen file you wish to save already exists in
the storage, the file will be overwritten.

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-146
 Storage (Others)

HDCOPY2 HDCOPY2 F0

All models Function: Hardcopy

This macro command is used to save the image of the screen displayed at the
time of macro execution with the backup number specified in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
F0 0 - 99: Backup number

Storage target
Storage target: \(access folder)\HDCOPY
File name: \HDxxx~yy.PNG

00 - 99: Backup number

000 - 999: Screen number

(Screen Nos. 1000 - 1023 invalid)

Supplemental remarks
• With the use of backup numbers, a maximum of 100 hardcopy images can be
saved per screen. You can, therefore, view time-series variations in these
images.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-147
Storage (Others)

HDCOPY3 HDCOPY3

All models Function: Hardcopy (file name designation)

This macro command is used to save the screen image (PNG) displayed at the
time of the macro execution, under a file name specified in [F0], to the storage.
Available device memory
Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
ASCII code (64 one-byte uppercase alphanumerics
F0
at the maximum): CSV file name

File
Storage target: \(access folder)\HDCOPY
File name: \xxxxxxxx.PNG

File name

Example
• The file named “SCREEN10.PNG” is created.
$u00100 = ‘SCREEN10’ (STRING)
HDCOPY3 $u00100
File name designation
* If [ Insert/Overwrite together with STRING Command] is checked in the [Device
Setting] or [Macro Editing Support] dialog, the macro command STRING can also be
registered. For more information on STRING, refer to page 4-46.

Supplemental remarks
• One file saves one screen. If a screen file you wish to save already exists in
the storage, the file will be overwritten.
• A full pathname can be specified for [F0].
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

Restrictions
• Symbols, [\], [/], [:], [*], [?], ["], [<], [>] and [|], cannot be used for a file name.

4-148
 Storage (Others)

SET_DRIVE SET_DRIVE F0

All models Function: Select drive

This macro command is used to select a storage drive to be accessed by a macro
command.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
Drive name designation*
F0 C: Built-in SD card drive
D: Storage device connected to USB port

* The drive name must be followed by a colon.

For details on text processing of the drive name, refer to “Supplemental
remarks” on page 4-121.

Example
• $u0010 =‘D:’
SET_DRIVE $u0010
The above program switches access to the D drive (storage device connected
to the USB port).

Supplemental remarks
• If the drive name is not correctly specified, no operation takes place.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)
• A drive change due to this macro command occurs only when any recipe
macro command is executed.
No drive change will be made for sampling data storage and macro
commands other than that which is recipe-related.
• After the drive has been changed with this command, files under the folder
specified for [Access Folder Name] in [System Setting]  [Storage Setting]
are accessed. To change the folder to access using a recipe-related macro
command, use “SET_ RECIPEFOLDER” (page 4-118).

4-149
Storage (Others)

COPY_FILE COPY_FILE F0 F1

All models Function: Copy file

This macro command is used to copy the file specified in [F0] to the file specified
in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 Full pathname of the copy source* Drive name designation
C: Built-in SD card drive
F1 Full pathname of the copy destination* D: Memory device
connected to USB port

* For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on page 4-121.

Example
• Operation 1
The program below copies “C:\EXT0000\RECIPE\abc.csv” to
“D:\EXT0000\RECIPE\abc.csv”.
- $u00100 = ‘C:\EXT0000\RECIPE\abc.csv’
$u00200 = ‘D:\EXT0000\RECIPE\’
COPY_FILE $u00100 $u00200
(Drive C:) (Drive D:)
SD EXT0000 SD EXT0000

RECIPE RECIPE
aaa.csv abc.csv
abc.csv
Copy
bbb.csv

• Operation 2
The program below copies all files stored in “C:\EXT0000\RECIPE\” to
“D:\EXT0000\RECIPE\”.
- $u00100 = ‘C:\EXT0000\RECIPE\*.*’
$u00200 = ‘D:\EXT0000\RECIPE\’
COPY_FILE $u00100 $u00200
(Drive C:) (Drive D:)
SD EXT0000 SD EXT0000

RECIPE RECIPE
aaa.csv aaa.csv
abc.csv abc.csv
bbb.csv Copy bbb.csv

4-150
 Storage (Others)

Supplemental remarks
• When an asterisk “*” is specified for the copy source file name (F0) or
extension name, all of the files or files with all extensions are copied. The
contents of subfolders are also copied.
• If the file name of the copy destination (F1) is omitted, the data is copied to the
file under the same name.
• If the full pathname is not correctly specified, no operation takes place.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully

4
completed. (Under development)

4-151
Storage (Others)

MOVE_FILE MOVE_FILE F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Move file

This macro command is used to move the file or folder specified in [F0] to the path
specified in [F1].
File renaming is also possible.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
Source full pathname Drive name designation
F0
(within 255 alphanumerics)* C: Built-in SD card drive
Target full pathname D: Storage device connected to
F1 USB port
(within 255 alphanumerics)*
F2 0 fixed

* For details on text processing of the file name, refer to “Supplemental

remarks” on page 4-121.

Example
• The program below moves “C:\EXT0000\RECIPE\REC0000.csv” to
“C:\EXT0000\RECIPE\SEISAN\abc.csv”.
$u00100 = ‘C:\EXT0000\RECIPE\REC0000.csv’
$u00200 = ‘C:\EXT0000\RECIPE\SEISAN\abc.csv’
$u00300 = 0 (W)
MOVE_FILE $u00100 $u00200 $u00300
(Drive C:) (Drive C:)

SD EXT0000 SD EXT0000

RECIPE RECIPE
REC0000.csv REC0001.csv
REC0001.csv REC0002.csv
REC0002.csv Move SEISAN
abc.csv

* The file “REC0000.csv”

is deleted.

4-152
 Storage (Others)

Supplemental remarks
• If the full pathname is not correctly specified, no operation takes place. An
error will result.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)
• In the case of a read-only file movement between drives, the file is copied to
the target location, and the file at the original location is not deleted.
• A folder to be moved is allowed to contain a maximum of 5 hierarchical levels
under the folder. If files or folders at further lower levels exist under the folder,
they can be copied to the target location, but those at the original location are 4
not deleted.

Restrictions
• Use alphanumerics to specify full pathnames as the source and the target. If
any characters other than alphanumerics are used, the function of this macro
command is not assured.
• Wildcard characters (such as “*” and “?”) cannot be used for full pathnames as
the source and the target.
• If a file of the same name already exists in the target location, it will not be
overwritten.
In this case, “1” is set in $s1062 (execution error). Change the file name and
execute the macro again.

4-153
Storage (Others)

READ_FILE READ_FILE F0 F1 F2 F3

All models Function: Read universal file

This macro command is used to read the file [F0] in binary format and to store the
obtained data in memory [F1] and after.
It is also possible to acquire the size of the file [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
F3

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Remarks
File read File size acquisition
Drive designation
F0 Source full pathname (within 255 alphanumerics) C: Built-in SD card drive
D: Memory connected to USB port
F1 Storage memory 0 fixed
F2
0 - 10485760 bytes: Size 0 fixed DEC
F2+1
F2+2 0 - 10485760 bytes: Offset from the
0 fixed DEC
F2+3 top of the file
F2+4 0 fixed
F3 Read data size storage memory File size storage
F3+1 (Data size successfully read) memory

: V series (return data)

Example
• File read
The file “ABC.DAT” is read from its 11th byte by 512 bytes into $u1000 -
$u1255.

$u00100 = ‘C:\EXT0000\ABC\ABC.DAT’ [Source full pathname]

$u00200 = 512 (D) [Size]
$u00202 = 10 (D) [Offset]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
READ_FILE $u00100 $u01000 $u00200 $u00300

4-154
 Storage (Others)

• File size acquisition

The size of the file “ABC.DAT” is read into $u300.

$u00100 = ‘C:\EXT0000\ABC\ABC.DAT’ [Source full pathname]

$u00200 = 0 (D) [0 fixed]
$u00202 = 0 (D) [0 fixed]
$u00204 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
READ_FILE $u00100 $u01000 $u00200 $u00300

Supplemental remarks
• If any characters other than alphanumerics are used to specify a source full
pathname, this macro command may not work normally. Be sure to use
alphanumerics.
• Wildcard characters (such as “*” and “?”) cannot be used for a full pathname
as the source.
• If the file specified as the source does not exist, an error will result.
• If an illegal full pathname is specified, this macro command does not work. An
4
error will result.
• In the event of an error during file reading, the data having been read is stored
in memory. However, the size of the data does not affect the successfully read
data size in [F3] and [F3+1].
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-155
Storage (Others)

WRITE_FILE WRITE_FILE F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Write to universal file

This macro command is used to write the data from memory [F1] and after in
binary format to the file [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
New Remarks
Overwriting Addition
creation
Drive designation
C: Built-in SD card drive
F0 Target full pathname
D: Memory connected to USB
port
F1 Source memory
F2 0 fixed 1 fixed 2 fixed
F2+1
0 - 10485760 bytes: Size DEC
F2+2
F2+3 0 - 10485760 bytes:
0 fixed 0 fixed
F2+4 Offset from the top of the file
F2+5 0 fixed

Example
• New creation
The 512 bytes of data in $u1000 - $u1255 is written to the new file “ABC.DAT”
created in the folder “ABC”.

$u00100 = ‘C:\EXT0000\ABC\ABC.DAT’ [Target full pathname]

$u00200 = 0 (W) [0: New creation]
$u00201 = 512 (D) [Size]
$u00203 = 0 (D) [0 fixed]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
WRITE_FILE $u00100 $u01000 $u00200

4-156
 Storage (Others)

• Overwriting
The 33rd byte and after in the existing file “ABC.DAT” is overwritten with the
16 bytes of data in $u1000 - $u1007.

$u00100 = ‘C:\EXT0000\ABC\ABC.DAT’ [Target full pathname]

$u00200 = 1 (W) [1: Overwriting]
$u00201 = 16 (D) [Size]
$u00203 = 32 (D) [Offset]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
WRITE_FILE $u00100 $u01000 $u00200

• Addition
The 512 bytes of data in $u1000 - $u1255 is added to the existing file
“ABC.DAT”.

$u00100 = ‘C:\EXT0000\ABC\ABC.DAT’
$u00200 = 2 (W)
[Target full pathname]
[2: Addition] 4
$u00201 = 512 (D) [Size]
$u00203 = 0 (D) [0 fixed]
$u00205 = 0 (W) [0 fixed]
WRITE_FILE $u00100 $u01000 $u00200

Supplemental remarks
• If the name of a new file you intend to create is already used, delete the
existing file first and create a new file.
• If the size specified with [F2+1] and [F2+2] is zero for a new file, an empty file
will be created.
• If the file you specified for overwriting or data addition does not exist, an error
will result.
• Wildcard characters (such as “*” and “?”) cannot be used for a full pathname
as the target, to which data is written.
• If an illegal full pathname is specified, this macro command does not work. An
error will result.
• In the event of an error during writing to a file, the data having been written
remains in the file.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1062.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-157
Real No. Arithmetical Operation

4.17 Real No. Arithmetical Operation

F_ADD(+) F0 = F1 + F2 (F)
Function: Real number addition
All models This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] real number data plus [F2]
real number data to [F0].

DWORD
F1+1 F1
F2+1 F2
F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
F1 IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F2

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-158
 Real No. Arithmetical Operation

F_SUB(-) F0 = F1 - F2 (F)
Function: Real number subtraction
All models This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] real number data minus
[F2] real number data to [F0].

DWORD
F1+1 F1
F2+1 F2
F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
4
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
F1 IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F2

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-159
Real No. Arithmetical Operation

F_MUL(X) F0  F2 (F)
Function: Real number multiplication
All models This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] real number data multiplied
by [F2] real number data to [F0].

DWORD
F1+1 F1
F2+1 F2
F0+1 F0

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
F1 IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F2

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-160
 Real No. Arithmetical Operation

F_DIV(/) F0 = F1 / F2 (F)
Function: Real number division
All models This macro command is used to write the result of [F1] real number data divided
by [F2] real number data to [F0].

DWORD
F1+1 F1
F2+1 F2
F0+1 F0 Remainder

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
4
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
F1 IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F2

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
3 Calculation operation execution error
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-161
Real No. Statistics

4.18 Real No. Statistics

F_SUM F0 = F_SUM (F1 C:F2) (F)

All models Function: Sum of real number data

This macro command is used to sum the real number data at the location starting
from the address specified in [F1] and write the result to [F0]. The data count is
specified in [F2].

DWORD
1 F1+1 F1
2 F1+3 F1+2
3 F1+5 F1+4 F0
: : SUM
F2

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device

Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1
F2 0 - 512

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-162
 Real No. Statistics

F_AVG F0 = F_AVG (F1 C:F2) (F)

Function: Average of real number data
All models This macro command is used to average the real number data at the location
starting from the address specified in [F1] and write the result to [F0]. The data
count is specified in [F2].

DWORD
1 F1+1 F1
2 F1+3 F1+2
3 F1+5 F1+4 F0
: : AVG
F2

Available device memory

4
Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1
F2 0 - 512

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-163
Real No. Statistics

F_MAX F0 = F_MAX (F1 C:F2) (F)

All models Function: Maximum of real number data

This macro command is used to find the maximum of the real number data at the
location starting from the address specified in [F1] and write the result to [F0]. The
data count is specified in [F2].

DWORD
1 F1+1 F1
2 F1+3 F1+2
3 F1+5 F1+4 F0
: : MAX
F2

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device

Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1
F2 0 - 512

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-164
 Real No. Statistics

F_MIN F0 = F_MIN (F1 C:F2) (F)

All models Function: Minimum of real number data

This macro command is used to find the minimum of the real number data at the
location starting from the address specified in [F1] and write the result to [F0]. The
data count is specified in [F2].

DWORD
1 F1+1 F1
2 F1+3 F1+2
3 F1+5 F1+4 F0
: : MIN
F2

Available device memory 4

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0
IEEE 32-bit single precision real number
F1
F2 0 - 512

Supplemental remarks
• For more information on the IEEE 32-bit single precision real numbers, refer to
the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1056.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Overflow
2 Underflow
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-165
Others

4.19 Others

;(Comment) ; (Comment)

All models Function: Comment

This is treated as a comment line. No command processing is required.

4-166
 Others

BRIGHT BRIGHT F0

All models Function: Brightness adjustment

This command is used to change the brightness of the TFT display to the level
specified in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
0: Bright
F0
...

127: Dark

Supplemental remarks
• The current brightness is output to $s956.
• When the macro command is executed, communication will pause for several
hundred milliseconds to allow for saving the setting value to the FROM. Avoid
the frequent use of the macro command.
• If MONITOUCH set to a low brightness is turned off, the backlight may not
light up at the next power-on.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-167
Others

GET_MSGBLK GET_MSGBLK F0 F1

All models Function: Message acquisition

This macro command is used to store the [F1]-specified message (text) in [F0]
memory using ASCII/shifted JIS codes.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Storage memory
F1 0 - 32767: Message No.

Example
• $u00050 = 256 (W)
GET_MSGBLK $u00100 $u00050

$u100 7 4 7 3 HEX ts
GET_MSGBLK $u101 6 9 7 2 HEX ir
$u102 6 7 6 E HEX gn
$u103 0 0 0 0 HEX Null code

The above program stores message No. 256 (= GNo. 1 and line No. 0) in
memory at $u100 and after using shifted JIS codes.

Supplemental remarks
• Regardless of the [Text Process] setting under [Communication Setting] for
PLC1, the data is stored in memory in the [LSB  MSB] sequence.
• A null code is added to the end. Even-number-byte text thereby uses one
extra word.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-168
 Others

PLC_ULR PLC_ULR F0 F1

All models Function: Read user log

This macro command is used to read the user log of the PLC with the station
number / CPU number specified in [F0] of the PLC1 into the address specified in
[F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled) 4
Setting range
Value Remarks
Higher- Setting required only
01 - 1F: Station number
order for 1:n connection
information definition

00 : CPU No.1
F0
Device memory

Lower- 01 : CPU No.2

order 02 : CPU No.3
03 : CPU No.4
1: Reading the number of user log
registrations
F0+1 0: Reading the most recent user
log
1 - 63: Reading user log No. n
the number of
registrations

F1
Reading

Stored also in the

Number of registrations (decimal)
special register Z105
F1+1

“1” to be stored if no
data exists in the user
0: Normal
F1 log specified in F0 or a
1: Error
communication error
occurs
F1+1 Year (ASCII)
Log read

F1+2 Month (ASCII)

F1+3 Day (ASCII)
F1+4 Hour (ASCII)
F1+5 Minute (ASCII)
F1+6 Second (ASCII)
F1+7 Main code (decimal)
F1+8 Sub-code (decimal)

:V series (Return data)

4-169
Others

Example
If a user log reading results in “05/10/19 11 : 20 : 34 +1 +23”, its format for storage
is as the following:

Storage format
m+0 0
m+1 3530HEX (= 05DEC)
m+2 3031HEX (= 10DEC)
m+3 3931HEX (= 19DEC)
m+4 3131HEX (= 11DEC)
m+5 3032HEX (= 20DEC)
m+6 3433HEX (= 34DEC)
m+7 1DEC
m+8 23DEC

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is valid only when Yokogawa’s FA-M3xxx is selected as
the PLC1.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-170
 Others

RECONNECT RECONNECT F0

All models Function: Multi-drop reconnection (PLC1)

This macro command is used to establish a connection again to the stations
specified in [F0] or the sub stations specified in [F0+1] when a multi-drop
connection is set at the PLC1.
When “1” is specified for [F0], reconnection with all ports is established, and
when “1” is specified for [F0+1], reconnection with all sub ports is established.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)
4
Setting range
Value Remarks
1: All station numbers
F0 0 - 255: PLC station number
designation
1: All sub-station
F0+1 0 - 255: PLC sub-station number
numbers designation

Supplemental remarks
• This command is only valid when a multi-drop connection (1:n) is set at PLC1.
To re-establish a connection other than with PLC1, use a “ RECONNECT_EX”
command (page 4-172).
• The macro command is used in the event of a communication fault.
• Reconnection with the specified station is performed only once.
• When reconnection is successful, the “interrupted” information in system
device memory ($s114 to 159) and 8-way communication device memory
($p[1] : 10 to 25) in the PLC1 are cleared.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-171
Others

RECONNECT_EX RECONNECT_EX PLC F0 F1

All models Function: Reconnection

This macro command is used to establish a connection again with the station
number [F1] or the sub-station number [F1+1] specified in [F0] of the PLC.
When “1” is specified for [F1], reconnection with all stations is established, and
when “1” is specified for [F1+1], reconnection with all sub stations is established.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 1 - 8: PLC number
1: All station numbers
F1 0 - 255: PLC station number
designation
1: All sub-station number
F1+1 0 - 255: PLC sub-station number
designation

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is used in the event of a communication fault.
• Reconnection with the specified station and the specified sub-station is
performed only once.
• When reconnection is successful, the “interrupted” information in 8-way
communication device memory ($p[F0] : 10 to 25) in the PLC is cleared. For
the PLC1, the “interrupted” information in system device memory ($s114 to
129) is also cleared at the same time.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-172
 Others

SAMPLE SAMPLE F0 F1 F2

All models Function: Acquire logging/alarm data

This macro command is used to store sampling data specified in [F2] of the block
number specified in [F1] at the device memory address specified in [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled) 4
Setting range
Value
F0 Storage target
0: Cursor specification
F1
1: Block specification
(F1 = 0) (F1 = 1)
F1+1 0: Base
0 - 11: Block number
1 - 10: Overlap ID 0 - 9
0 - 255:
F1+2 Not used
ID No. of the item displayed
0: Acquisition of sampling data
F2 1: Acquisition of average / maximum / minimum / total data
2: Acquisition of alarm data
([F2] = 0) ([F2] = 1) ([F2] = 2)
F2+1 0: With no time data
0 - : Word No. Not used
1: With time data

1. Acquiring sampling data (with no time data)

• When [F1] = 0
When the specified logging viewer is selected (the cursor is displayed), the
data at the cursor position is stored.
When the specified logging viewer is not selected (the cursor is not displayed),
the most recent sampling data is stored.
• When [F1] = 1
The most recent sampling data is stored.
• Specify the sampling data to be acquired in [F1+1] and [F1+2].
• Set “0” for [F2] and [F2+1].
• The following data is stored in the [F0] memory.

Device memory Contents Word count

F0 Sampling data (1) 1
F0+1 Sampling data (2) 1
F0+2 Sampling data (3) 1
: : :
F0 + (sampling word count  1) Sampling data (sampling word count) 1

* When [Real Time Display] is selected for [Display Mode] in the logging viewer, no
operation takes place.

4-173
Others

2. Acquiring sampling data (with time data)

• When [F1] = 0
When the specified logging viewer is selected (the cursor is displayed), the
data at the cursor position is stored.
When the specified logging viewer is not selected (the cursor is not displayed),
the most recent sampling data is stored.
• When [F1] = 1
The most recent sampling data is stored.
• Specify the sampling data to be acquired in [F1+1] and [F1+2].
• Set “0” for [F2] and “1” for [F2+1].
• The following data is stored in the [F0] device memory.

Word
Device memory Contents
count
F0 Sampling time (Greenwich data) 2
F0+2 Sampling time in msec (0 - 999) 1
F0+3 Sampling data (1) 1
F0+4 Sampling data (2) 1
: : :
F0 + (3 + sampling word count  1) Sampling data (sampling word count) 1

* When [Real Time Display] is selected for [Display Mode] in the logging viewer, no
operation takes place.

3. Acquiring average / maximum / minimum / total data

• Specify the sampling data to be acquired in [F1+1] and [F1+2].
• Set “1” for [F2].
• Set the number of words for [F2+1].
• The following data is stored in the [F0] device memory.

Device memory Contents Word count

F0 Average 2
F0+2 Maximum 2
F0+4 Minimum 2
F0+6 Total 2
Result of overflow
F0+8 0: No overflow 1
1: Overflow occurred

* When [Real Time Display] is selected for [Display Mode] in the logging viewer, no
operation takes place.

4. Acquiring alarm information

• Specify the sampling data to be acquired in [F1+1] and [F1+2].
• Set “2” for [F2].
• The following data is stored in the [F0] device memory.

Device memory Contents Word count

F0 Automatic operation time 2
F0+2 Automatic operation stop time 2
F0+4 Program stop time 2
F0+6 Number of stops 1
F0+7 Rate of operation 1

* This command can be used only for the alarm server.

If [Alarm History] ([Alarm Block]  [Alarm Device]) is not checked, no operation takes
place.

4-174
 Others

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-175
Others

SEARCH_FILE SEARCH_FILE F0 F1

All models Function: JPEG file search

This macro command is used to search for JPEG file numbers in the SNAP/JPEG
folder stored in the storage based on the specified increments and store the result
in the device memory [F0].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 Search result (file number) storage target
0: Searches the JPEG folder for JPxxxxx.jpg file
F1
1: Searches the SNAP folder for VDxxxxx.jpg file
F1+1 0 - 32767: Search start file number
F1+2 32767 - 32767: Increments

Example
• $u200 = 0 (W) [JPEG folder search]
$u201 = 0 (W) [Search start file No. 0]
$u202 = 10 (W) [Increments 10]
SEARCH_FILE $u100 $u200
$u201 = $u100 (W)

SD EXT0000

JPEG
JP00000.jpg
JP00001.jpg
$u100 $u100
JP00002.jpg
JP00010.jpg 10 200
JP00015.jpg Macro Macro
JP00200.jpg execution execution

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is valid even if no JPEG display item exists on the
screen.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-176
 Others

ADJ_VOLUME ADJ_VOLUME F0 F1 F2

V9 Standard Function: Volume adjustment

V9 Lite This macro command is used to change the volume of the channel specified in
[F0] to the value specified in [F1]/[F2].

Volume adjustment value Volume

High 7 0dB
6 -3dB
5 -6dB
4 -9dB
3 -12dB
2 -15dB

Low
1
0
-18dB
-21dB
4
*The default is “5” (6 dB).

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1
F2

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
0: L channel
F0 1: R channel
2: Both channels L and R
F1 0 - 7: Volume adjustment for L channel
F2 0 - 7: Volume adjustment for R channel

Supplemental remarks
• This command is valid only for the V9 Standard model.
• To save the ADJ_VOLUME setting to the V series, use SAVE _VOLUME.
When the V series is turned off without executing the SAVE_VOLUME
command following the ADJ_VOLUME command, the viewing angle is reset
to the one that was valid before the execution of the ADJ_VOLUME
command.
• The current volume adjustment value (0 - 7) for the L channel is stored in
$s1001. The current volume adjustment value (0 - 7) for the R channel is
stored in $s1002.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-177
Others

SAVE_VOLUME SAVE_VOLUME

V9 Standard Function: Save volume adjustment value

V9 Lite This macro command is used to save the volume adjustment value set by the
“ADJ_VOLUME” command in FROM.

Example
• ADJ_VOLUME 2 6 6
SAVE_VOLUME
The above program sets the volume for both L and R channels to 6.

Supplemental remarks
• This command is valid only for the V9 Standard model.
• When the SAVE_VOLUME command is executed, the communication (serial,
Ethernet) is temporarily interrupted. Do not execute the SAVE_VOLUME
command frequently.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-178
 Others

TREND REFRESH TREND REFRESH F0 F1

All models Function: Refresh trend data display

The macro command is used to refresh the logging viewer display specified in [F0]
and [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F0
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
0: Base
F0
1 - 10: Overlap ID 0 - 9
F1 0 - 255: ID

Supplemental remarks
• This command is valid only when [Display mode: Historical Display] and
[Display method: Graph Display] are set for the logging viewer.
• If device memory addresses are specified in logging viewer settings for [Graph
Min. Value] and [Graph Max. Value], and [Max. Scale Value] and [Min. Scale
Value], the display must be refreshed each time data at any of these devices is
changed.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s1063.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-179
Others

SYS SYS (SET_SCRN) F1

All models Function: Screen number designation

This macro command is used to display the screen specified in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 SET_SCRN
F1 0 - 9999: Screen number

Example
• $u100 = 55 (W) [Screen number]
SYS (SET_SCRN) $u100

The above program displays screen No. 55.

Supplemental remarks
• If a screen number that does not exist is specified in [F1], the macro command
is disabled.
• The macro command is invalid in screen OPEN, screen CLOSE, overlap
library OPEN, overlap library CLOSE, and initial macros.
• The macro command is valid only once in a macro created on the macro edit
sheet. Its execution timing is set at the end of the macro on the edit sheet.
• Do not execute the macro command in every cycle using a CYCLE macro or
an event timer macro.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-180
 Others

SYS SYS (SET_MOVLP) F1

All models Function: Multi-overlap/global overlap setting

This macro command is used to display the overlap library specified in F1+1 on
the overlap ID in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
Dot (unit: 4  1) Line/column (unit 8  20)
F0 SET_MOVLP
F1 0 - 9: Overlap ID
F1+1 0 - 1023: Overlap library number
F1+2 0 - 1023: X coordinate 0 - 127: X coordinate
F1+3 0 - 767: Y coordinate 0 - 38: Y coordinate

Example
• $u100 = 2 (W) [Overlap ID]
$u101 = 12 (W) [Overlap library number]
$u102 = 50 (W) [X coordinate]
$u103 = 5 (W) [Y coordinate]
SYS (SET_MOVLP) $u100

Line/Column:
The above program displays overlap ID2 and overlap library No. 12 at the
coordinates X: 400 and Y: 100.

Dot:
The above program displays overlap ID2 and overlap library No. 12 at the
coordinates X: 48* and Y: 5.
* Since four dots are treated as one unit on the X axis, any value in the range of “48” to
“51” on the axis is regarded as “48”.

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is valid when [Internal] is checked under [Designate] in
the [Multi-Overlap] or [Global Overlap Setting] dialog.
• If [F1]>9, the macro command is disabled.
• If an overlap library number specified in [F1+1] does not exist, the macro
command is disabled.
• If the specified X and Y coordinates are outside the permissible ranges, the
display appears in the lower right corner of the screen.
• The macro command is invalid in a screen CLOSE macro and an initial macro.
• The macro command is valid only once in a macro created on the macro edit
sheet for each overlap ID. Its execution timing is set at the end of the macro
on the edit sheet.
• Use the OVLP_SHOW command to turn off the multi-overlap or global
overlap.
• Do not execute the macro command in every cycle using a CYCLE macro or
an event timer macro.

4-181
Others

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-182
 Others

SYS SYS (OVLP_SHOW) F1

All models Function: Overlap ON/OFF

This macro command is used to show/hide the overlap ID specified in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value 4
F0 OVLP_SHOW
F1 0 - 9: Overlap ID
0: OFF (non-display)
F1+1
1: ON (display)

Example
• $u100 = 2 (W) [Overlap ID]
$u101 = 0 (W) [OFF]
SYS (OVLP_SHOW) $u100

The above program turns off overlap ID2.

• $u100 = 2 (W) [Overlap ID]

$u101 = 1 (W) [ON]
SYS (OVLP_SHOW) $u100

The above program turns on overlap ID2.

Supplemental remarks
• If [F1]>9, the macro command is disabled.
• If F1+1 = 0, the macro command is valid for normal, call-, multi-, and global
([Designate]: [Internal]) overlaps.
• The macro command is invalid in screen CLOSE, overlap library CLOSE and
initial macros.
• The macro command is valid only once in a macro created on the macro edit
sheet for each overlap ID. Its execution timing is set at the end of the macro
on the edit sheet.
• Do not execute the macro command in every cycle using a CYCLE macro or
an event timer macro.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-183
Others

SYS SYS (OVLP_POS) F1

All models Function: Overlap relocation

This macro command is used to move the overlap ID specified in [F1] to the
coordinates X in [F1+1] and Y in [F1+2].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
Dot (unit: 4  1) Line/column (unit 8  20)
F0 OVLP_POS
F1 0 - 9: Overlap ID
F1+1 0 - 1023: X coordinate 0 - 127: X coordinate
F1+2 0 - 767: Y coordinate 0 - 38: Y coordinate

Example
• $u100 = 2 (W) [Overlap ID]
$u101 = 50 (W) [X coordinate]
$u102 = 5 (W) [Y coordinate]
SYS (OVLP_POS) $u100
Line/Column:
The above program moves overlap ID2 to coordinates X: 400 and Y: 100.
Dot:
The above program moves overlap ID2 to coordinates X: 48* and Y: 5.
* Since four dots are treated as one unit on the X axis, any value in the range
of “48” to “51” on the axis is regarded as “48”.

Supplemental remarks
• If [F1]>9, the macro command is disabled.
• In the event of a normal or a call-overlap, the macro command is enabled also
to display the overlap.
• The X and Y coordinates specified by the macro command take effect until the
screen is switched. If OVLP_SHOW is executed after OVLP_POS, the overlap
appears at the coordinates specified by OVLP_POS.
• The macro command is invalid in screen OPEN, screen CLOSE, overlap
library CLOSE and initial macros.
• The macro command is valid only once in a macro created on the macro edit
sheet for each overlap ID. Its execution timing is set at the end of the macro
on the edit sheet.
• Do not execute the macro command in every cycle using a CYCLE macro or
an event timer macro.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-184
 Others

SYS SYS (GET_MSG) F1

All models Function: Message acquisition

This macro command is used to store the F1-specified message in memory at the
$u address in F1+1 using ASCII/shifted JIS codes.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
F0 GET_MSG
F1 0 - 32767: Message number
F1+1 0 - 16383: Storage device number
$u[F1+1] Shifted JIS/ASCII
50 words maximum
-

: V series (Return data)

Example
• $u50 = 256 (W) [Message number]
$u51 = 100 (W) [Storage target device memory No.]
SYS (GET_MSG) $u50
The above program stores message No. 256 (= GNo. 1 and line No. 0) in
memory at $u100 and after using shifted JIS codes.
The above program shows the case when [MSB LSB is selected for [Text
Process] under [Communication Setting] for the PLC1.

Supplemental remarks
• Swap between the higher-order byte and the lower-order byte can be set by
selecting an option for [Text Process] under [Communication Setting].
• Regardless of the setting above, use a “ GET_MSGBLK” command (page 4-
168) for storing data by [LSB  MSB].
• A null code is added to the end. Even-number-byte text thereby uses one
extra word.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-185
Others

SYS SYS (GET_XY) F1

All models Function: Acquisition of X and Y coordinates on circumference

This macro command is used to calculate X and Y coordinates from a radius, an
angle and, center coordinates.
Result of calculation
Coordinates XY

Center Angle
coordinates

0
Radius

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 GET_XY
F1 0 or above: Radius
F1+1 0 to 3600: Angle (0.1-degrees)
F1+2 0 or above: Center coordinate X
F1+3 0 or above: Center coordinate Y
F1+4 0 or above: X coordinate
F1+5 0 or above: Y coordinate

:V series (Return data)

Example
• $u100 = 100 (W) [Radius]
Execution result
$u101 = 900 (W) [Angle]
$u102 = 200 (W) [X coordinate X,Y=(200, 100)
of the center]
X,Y=(200, 200) 90
$u103 = 200 (W) [Y coordinate
of the center]
SYS (GET_XY) $u100 0
100-dot

On the circumference of a circle

100 dots in radius with the
center at coordinates X: 200
and Y: 200, the above program calculates the X and Y coordinates of the point
at an angle of 90 degrees.
X coordinate: $u104 = 200
Y coordinate: $u105 = 100

Supplemental remarks
• If a value specified for the angle is 3,600 or above, the value is corrected to
the remainder as the result of division by 3,600.

4-186
 Others

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-187
Others

SYS SYS (SET_BZ) F1

All models Function: Buzzer control

This macro command is used to control the buzzer of MONITOUCH.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 SET_BZ
0: Normal
F1 1: Error
2: Sound change
0: Standard
1: Short
F1+1 Setting required if F1 = 2
2: None
3: Continuous

Example
• $u100 = 2 (W) [Sound change]
$u101 = 2 (W) [None]
SYS (SET_BZ) $u100

The above program turns off the MONITOUCH buzzer.

Supplemental remarks
• The [Buzzer] tab window setting in the [Unit Setting] dialog ([System Setting]
 [Unit Setting]  [Buzzer]) takes effect only at the time of initial connection
of MONITOUCH.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-188
 Others

SYS SYS (GET_TIME) F1

All models Function: System time acquisition

This macro command is used to acquire values from the timer that increments by
one at 10-ms intervals after power-on.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range 4
Value
F0 GET_TIME
F1
0 - 4294967295 (10 msec)
F1+1

:V series (Return data)

Example
• SYS(GET_TIME) $u100
The above program acquires the time that has elapsed after power-on.

$u100 = 27900 (W)

279000 msec = 279 sec = 4 minutes 39 seconds

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-189
Others

SYS SYS (STA_TIME) F1

SYS (CHK_TIME) F1
All models
Function: Timer setting
STA_TIME starts the timer. CHK_TIME confirms a time-out.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
• STA_TIME

Value Remarks
F0 STA_TIME
Time-out flag
F1 0: Counting
1: Time-out
0: Timer type 0 F1 = 1: Stops the timer
F1+1 F1 = 1:
1: Timer type 1
Updates the timer start time
F1+2 0 - 65535: Time-out time 10 ms
F1+3 Timer start time

:V series (Return data)

• CHK_TIME
For [F1], use the same device memory as for STA_TIME.

Example
<Timer type 0>
• OPEN macro
$u101 = 0 (W) [Timer type]
$u102 = 50 (W) [Time-up time]
SYS (STA_TIME) $u100

The above program starts the timer type 0, for which a 500-ms time-out period
is set.
$u103 =current time and $u100=0 are set.

• CYCLE macro
SYS (CHK_TIME) $u100
1
$u100 = 0 $u100 500ms
 Lapse of 500 ms 0
$u100 = 1 (W)
(End) START CHECK

4-190
 Others

<Timer type 1>

• OPEN macro
$u101 = 1 (W) Timer type
$U102 = 50 (W) Time-up time
SYS (STA_TIME) $u100

The above program starts the timer type 1, for which a 500-ms time-out period
is set.
$u103 =current time and $u100=0 are set.

• CYCLE macro
SYS (CHK_TIME) $u100
IF ($u100! = 0) LB 0
1
RET
LB0 $u100 0 500ms 500ms 500ms
$u200 = $u200+1 (W)
RET START CHECK 4
$u100 = 0
 Lapse of 500 ms
$u100 = 1 and $u200 = 1 are set.

$u103 =current time and $u100=0 are set.
 Lapse of 500 ms
$u100 = 1 and $u200 = 2 are set.

(Repetition)

Supplemental remarks
• The timer base is set to 10 ms.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-191
Others

SYS SYS (GET_CLND) F1

All models Function: Calendar acquisition

This macro command is used to acquire the values of the system calendar.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 GET_CLND
F1 0 or above: Year (4-digit)
F1+1 1 - 12: Month
F1+2 1 - 31: Day
F1+3 0 - 23: Hour
F1+4 0 - 59: Minute
F1+5 0 - 59: Second
0: Sunday
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
F1+6 3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday

:V series (Return data)

Example
• SYS (GET_CLND) $u100

$u100 = 2005
$u101 = 7
$u102 = 15
[July 15, 2005 Friday 15:25:41]
$u103 = 15
$u104 = 25
$u105 = 41
$u106 = 5

Supplemental remarks
• The calendar is acquired not from a PLC or other external device but from the
V series unit.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-192
 Others

SYS SYS (SET_CLND) F1

All models Function: Calendar setting

This macro command is used to set the values of eight words starting from the
address specified in [F1] to the system calendar. When MONTOUCH is connected
with PLC1 including the calendar function, this macro command also sets the
PLC1’s calendar.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)
4
Setting range
Value
F0 SET_CLND
F1 0 or above: Year (4-digit/2-digit)
F1+1 1 - 12: Month
F1+2 1 - 31: Day
F1+3 0 - 23: Hour
F1+4 0 - 59: Minute
F1+5 0 - 59: Second
Invalid; to be automatically
F1+6 Day of the week
calculated by MONITOUCH
F1+7 0 - 31: PLC station number For 1:n connection only

Example
• $u100 = 2005 (W)
$u101 = 7 (W)
$u102 = 15 (W) [July 15, 2005 Friday 15:00:00]
$u103 = 15 (W)
$u104 = 0 (W)
$u105 = 0 (W)
SYS (SET_CLND) $u100

The above program sets the calendars in the V series and the PLC1 to July
15, 2005 on Friday at 15:00:00.

Supplemental remarks
• When setting calendar data for PLC 2 to 8, use a macro command
“ PLC_CLND” (page 4-88).
• When setting calendar data only for the V series, use a macro command
“ SYS (SET_SYS_CLND) F1” (page 4-213).
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-193
Others

SYS SYS (SET_BUFNO) F1

All models Function 1: Logging information

This macro command is used to store the average, maximum, minimum, and total
of logging numbers 0 to 31 located in the block number specified in [F1] in system
devices $s180 to 435.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 SET_BUFNO
F1 0 - 11: Logging block No.
$s180 - 181 Logging No. 0 Average
$s182 - 183 Logging No. 0 Maximum
$s184 - 185 Logging No. 0 Minimum
$s186 - 187 Logging No. 0 Total
$s188 - 195 Logging No. 1 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s196 - 203 Logging No. 2 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s204 - 211 Logging No. 3 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s212 - 219 Logging No. 4 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s220 - 227 Logging No. 5 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s228 - 235 Logging No. 6 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s236 - 243 Logging No. 7 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s244 - 251 Logging No. 8 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s252 - 259 Logging No. 9 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s260 - 267 Logging No. 10 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s268 - 275 Logging No. 11 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s276 - 283 Logging No. 12 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s284 - 291 Logging No. 13 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s292 - 299 Logging No. 14 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s300 - 307 Logging No. 15 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s308 - 315 Logging No. 16 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s316 - 323 Logging No. 17 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s324 - 331 Logging No. 18 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s332 - 339 Logging No. 19 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s340 - 347 Logging No. 20 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s348 - 355 Logging No. 21 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s356 - 363 Logging No. 22 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s364 - 371 Logging No. 23 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s372 - 379 Logging No. 24 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s380 - 387 Logging No. 25 Average/maximum/minimum/total

4-194
 Others

Value
$s388 - 395 Logging No. 26 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s396 - 403 Logging No. 27 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s404 - 411 Logging No. 28 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s412 - 419 Logging No. 29 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s420 - 427 Logging No. 30 Average/maximum/minimum/total
$s428 - 435 Logging No. 31 Average/maximum/minimum/total
:V series (Return data)

Example
• $u100 = 5 (W) [Block No.]
SYS (SET_BUFNO) $u100
The above program stores the average, maximum, minimum and total of block
No. 5 in $s180 to 435.
4
Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• When multiple logging blocks are set, the block with the smallest number is
selected as default.
• The macro command does not work if no display area exists on the screen.
• Logging numbers 32 to 255 are not available with this macro command.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-195
Others

Function 2: Alarm log information

This macro command is used to store alarm log information of block number
specified in [F1] in $s436 - 443.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 SET_BUFNO
F1 0 - 11: Alarm block number
$s436 - 437 Automatic operation time
$s438 - 439 Automatic operation stop time
$s440 - 441 Program stop time
$s442 Number of stops
$s443 Rate of operation XX.X

:V series (Return data)

Example
• $u100 = 4 (W) [Block No.]
SYS(SET_BUFNO) $u100
The above program stores the alarm log information of block No. 4 in $s436 -
443.

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• This command is valid only when [Alarm History] ([Alarm Block]  [Alarm
Device]) is checked.
• For more information on each data, refer to the V9 Series Reference Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-196
 Others

SYS SYS (GET_SMPL) F1

All models Function: Acquire logging/alarm data

This macro command is used to store the data of the specified block, logging, or
alarm device memory in the device memory address $u [F1+2].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
F0 GET_SMPL
F1 0 - 11: Block number
0 or above: Logging number / Alarm device memory
F1+1
number
0 - 16383: Storage target internal device memory
F1+2
No. “n”
Time data 0
Trigger / Constant cycle / Device memory map

$u n 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Month: 1 - 12 Day: 1 - 31 Hour: 0 - 23

Time data 1

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

$u n+1 Minutes & seconds (unit: seconds)

[Time data 1]/[60] = [A] remainder [B]
[A]: minutes
[B]: seconds
$u n+2
Logging data (maximum number of logging data:
$u n+3
128 words)
:
Time data 0

$u n 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Month: 1 - 12 Day: 1 - 31 Hour: 0 - 23

Time data 1
(Alarm logging)
Alarm

$u n+1 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Minutes & seconds (unit: seconds)

Sampling bit number

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$u n+2
0: OFF Bit number
1: ON

4-197
Others

Value
Time data 0

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$u n
Month: 1 - 12 Day: 1 - 31 Hour: 0 - 23

(Time order alarming)

Alarm Time data 1

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$u n+1
Minutes & seconds (unit: seconds)

Sampling relay number

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
$u n+2
Relay number

$u n Time data 0
Time data 1

$u n+1 Time data 1 Time data 0

GMT-based UNIX time from January 1, 1970

(alarm tracking)

Alarm bit information

Alarm

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Bit number
$u n+2 1: Power-off after an alarm occurrence
1: Deleted by DEL key
1: First cause
0: Reset
1: Occurrence

:  V series (return data)

Example
• $u100 = 3 (W) [Block No.]
$u101 = 0 (W) [Alarm device memory No.]
$u102 = 200 (W) [Storage target device memory]
SYS (GET_SMPL) $u100
The above program stores the information of alarm device memory No. 0 in
alarm block No. 3 in $s200.
For an alarm (time order alarming):
$u200 = 1E8F HEX 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
$u201 = 06B4 HEX
7 20 15
$u202 = 0002 HEX
July 20, 15:28:36, bit No. 2 ON

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-198
 Others

SYS SYS (GET_SCUR) F1

Function: Cursor point acquisition

All models
This macro command is used to store the sampling number and the cursor
address associated with the of the logging or alarm viewer currently being
displayed.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range 4
Value Remarks
F0 GET_SCUR
0: Base
F1
1 - 10: Overlap ID 0 - 9
F1+1 0 - 255 : ID
The most recent information to be
0: Cursor non-display
stored in F1+3 and F1+4
F1+2
The cursor information to be
1: Cursor display
stored in F1+3 and F1+4
F1+3 0 or above: Sample number Used by GET_SMPL
F1+4 0 or above: Cursor address Sampling number comparison*

:V series (Return data)

* Whether or not the acquired sampling number is the same as that previously
acquired is checked.
Even if the sampling number remains the same, any change in the cursor
address means that the data to be fetched has also changed.
Contrary, even if the sampling number has changed, no change in the cursor
address means that the data to be accessed also remains the same.

Example
• $u100 = 0 (W) [Base]
$u101 = 1 (W) [ID]
SYS (GET_SCUR) $u100

The above program acquires the cursor point of the logging or alarm data
(ID 1) on the base screen.

$u102 = 1 [Cursor being displayed]

$u103 = 28 [Sample number]
$u104 = 39 (W) [Cursor address]

Supplemental remarks
• This command can be used only in the V8-compatible mode.
• The macro command is valid in the following cases:
- [Historical Display] is selected for [Display mode] in the logging viewer.
- [Event History] is selected for [Display mode] in the alarm viewer.
• If the sampling number is “5” at the time of the execution of GET_SCUR, the
sampling count (numerical data display) on the screen shows “6”.
This results from the fact that the cursor point starts from “0” and the sampling
count (numerical data display) starts from “1”.

4-199
Others

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-200
 Others

SYS SYS (DSP_DATA) F1

All models Function: Show/hide numerical data display

This macro command is used to show/hide numerical data displays placed in the
specified location (ID).

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
F0 DSP_DATA
0: Base
1 - 3: Overlap ID 0 - 2
F1
4 - 7: Data block No. 0 - 3
8 - 14: Overlap ID 3 - 9
F1+1 0 - 255: ID
0: Not display
F1+2
1: Display

Example
• $u100 = 0 (W) [Base]
$u101 = 1 (W) [ID]
$u102 = 0 (W) [Not display]
SYS (DSP_DATA) $u100

The above program hides all numerical data displays of ID 1 on the base
screen.

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is valid for numerical data displays only. It cannot be
used for character and message displays.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-201
Others

SYS SYS (CHG_DATA) F1

All models Function: Change numerical data display property

This macro command is used to change the properties of the numerical data
displays placed in the specified location (ID).

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 CHG_DATA
0: Base
1 - 3: Overlap ID 0 - 2
F1
4 - 7: Data block No. 0 - 3
8 - 14: Overlap ID 3 - 9
F1+1 0 - 255: ID
0: Without signs
1: With signs
2: With sign (+)
F1+2
3: HEX
4: OCT
5: BIN
Color

Background color Foreground color

15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 to 127 colors 0 to 127 colors
Blink Blink

Color Code (HEX)

F1+3 Black 00
Blue 01
Red 02
Magenta 03
Green 04
Cyan 05
Yellow 06
White 07

Decimal point and number of digits

F1+4 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Decimal point 0 - 10 Number of digits 1 - 31

4-202
 Others

Example
The above program changes the properties of the numerical data display of
ID1 placed on the base screen.
- Type: HEX
- Background color: Black
- Foreground color: Green
- Decimal Point: None
- Number of digits: 5

$u200 = 0 (W) [Base]

$u201 = 1 (W) [ID]
$u202 = 0 (W) [Not display]
SYS (DSP_DATA) $u200

$u100 = 0 (W) [Base]

$u101 = 1 (W)
$u102 = 3 (W)
[ID]
[Type] 4
$u103 = 0004H (W) [Color]
$u104 = 0005H (W) [Decimal point and number of digits]
SYS (CHG_DATA) $u100 macro execution

$u200 = 0 (W) [Base]

$u201 = 1 (W) [ID]
$u202 = 1 (W) [Display]
SYS (DSP_DATA) $u200

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is valid for numerical data displays only. It cannot be
used for character and message displays.
• When using this macro command, be sure to execute the command
DSP_DATA to redisplay the data. For more information on DSP_DATA, refer
to page 4-201.
• Even on MONITOUCH with 32k- or 64k-color display, 128 colors + blink
([Custom Color]  [Palette 1]) are available with the macro command.
• 128-color codes
The boxes on the palette are provided with their individual codes.

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
00 0F
10 1F
20 2F
30 3F
40 4F
50 5F
60 6F
70 7F

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-203
Others

SYS SYS (STA_LIST) F1

All models Function: Data sheet print

This macro command is used to print data sheets.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 STA_LIST
F1 0 - 1023: Print start number
F1+1 1 - 1023: Number of pages to be printed
F1+2
ASCII code: Output file name (64 one-byte alphanumeric characters
: maximum) *
F1+33

* Valid only when $s1656 = 1 (output in PDF)

Example
• $u100 = 3 (W) [Print start number]
$u101 = 1 (W) [Number of pages to be printed]
SYS (STA_LIST) $u100 macro execution

The above program prints data sheet No. 3.

Data sheet No. 3

A line

B line

C line

D line

E line

• $s1656 = 1(W) Output destination: PDF

$u100 = 3(W) Print start number
$u101 = 1(W) Number of pages to be printed
$u102 = TEST (STRING)1(W) File name
STA_LIST $u100
Datasheet No. 3 is output to the storage device in PDF format.

Data sheet No. 3

A line

B line

SD C line

D line

E line

4-204
 Others

Supplemental remarks
• If nothing is registered on a data sheet, specifying the page of this sheet does
not produce a printout of it.

[Data Sheet Edit]

Data sheet No. 10
No. 11
Data sheet No.10 No. 12
Data sheet No.11 No. 13
Data sheet No.12 No. 14
A Line

B Line
A Line Data sheet No.14
A Line
C Line B Line
B Line
D Line C Line A Line
C Line
E Line D Line B Line
D Line
F Line E Line C Line
E Line
G Line F Line D Line
F Line
H Line G Line E Line
I Line G Line
H Line F Line
J Line H Line
I Line G Line
I Line
J Line H Line
J Line
I Line

J Line

Data sheet No.10

4
No.11
A Line
No.12
B Line A Line

C Line B Line A Line Data sheet No.14

D Line C Line B Line

E Line D Line C Line

A Line
F Line E Line D Line
B Line
G Line F Line E Line
C Line
H Line G Line F Line
D Line
I Line H Line G Line

PLC
E Line
J Line I Line H Line
F Line
J Line I Line
G Line
J Line
H Line

I Line

J Line

$u100 = 10 [Print start number] Data sheet No. 10 to 12 and 14 can be printed.
$u101 = 5 [Number of pages to The page that is not stored, No. 13, is ignored,
be printed] and four pages are output.
SYS (STA_LIST) $u100
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-205
Others

SYS SYS (SET_BKLT) F1

All models Function: Backlight control

This macro command is used to control the backlight.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 SET_BKLT
0: OFF
1: ON
F1
Valid when [Auto 1/2/3] is
2: OFF time change
selected
F1+1 0 - 65535: OFF time (sec) Setting required if F1 = 2

Example
• $u100 = 0 (W) [OFF]
SYS (SET_BKLT) $u100

The above program turns off the backlight.

Supplemental remarks
• When [Always ON] is selected for [Action] on the [Backlight] tab window in the
[Unit Setting] dialog ([System Setting]  [Unit Setting]), the macro command
is invalid.
• The macro command is invalid with the control device memory ON.
• Do not execute the macro command in macros to be executed constantly
using a CYCLE macro, an interval timer, or an event timer macro.
• The use of a switch ON macro to execute a backlight turn-on command will
not be possible.
• At power-on, the backlight is restored to the status as set in [Backlight] tab
window (initial status) in the [Unit Setting] dialog ([System Setting]  [Unit
Setting]). The internal memory $L is available to retain the value set with this
macro command. By using the initial macro at power-on, this macro command
is executable according to the value you stored with $L.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-206
 Others

SYS SYS (RESTART) F1

All models Function: Restart

This macro command is used to restart the V series when the time (in seconds)
specified in [F1] has elapsed.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
F0 RESTART
F1 0 - 60: Time (sec)

Example
• $u100 = 10 (W) [sec]
SYS (RESTART) $u100

The above program maintains the check screen for 10 seconds and then
switches it to the RUN screen.

Supplemental remarks
• When the macro command has been executed, the data in the internal
memory $u becomes “0”.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-207
Others

SYS SYS (CHG_LANG) F1

All models Function: Language change

This macro command is used to switch the language displayed on MONITOUCH
to the language specified in [F1].

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 CHG_LANG
0: Language 1
1: Language 2
2: Language 3
F1 :
13: Language 14
14: Language 15
15: Language 16

Example
In the example below, the ON macros for the screen change switches are used to
switch between two languages.
Screen No. 0

Which language do you prefer?

Switch: Japanese Switch: Korean

Function: Screen No. 1 Function: Screen No. 1
Japanese Korean
ON macro edit: ON macro edit:
$u00100 = 0 (W) $u00100 = 1 (W)
SYS (CHG_LANG) $u00100 SYS (CHG_LANG) $u00100

Screen No. 1

Screen in language 1 Screen in language 2

Supplemental remarks
• When the screen is switched, the language also switches.
To change the language on the same screen, use the “SYS(RESET_SCRN)”
command (page 4-210).
• At power-on, the language as specified for [Initial Interface Language] in the
[Font Setting] dialog takes effect (initial status).

4-208
 Others

• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.

Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-209
Others

SYS SYS (RESET_SCRN) F1

Function: Redisplay screen

All models
This macro command is used to reset the currently displayed screen. It is
convenient for switching languages and for switching the display of screen
libraries.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value
F0 RESET_SCRN
Bit OFF (0) : Executed
Bit ON (1) : Disabled
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Reserved for the system (fixed at 0)

F1 Screen OPEN macro
Screen CLOSE macro
$T device memory initialization
Transmission of screen interrupt command
(with universal serial selected)
* Multiple bits can be specified at the same time.

Example
• $u100 = 0H (W)
SYS (RESET_SCRN) $u100
Close macro, open macro, and internal device memory $T are initialized and
the screen currently displayed is reset.
• $u100 = CH (W)
SYS (RESET_SCRN) $u100
The screen currently displayed is reset without executing close macro and
open macro.

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is invalid in screen OPEN, screen CLOSE, overlap
library OPEN, overlap library CLOSE, and initial macros. Executing these
error results in failure.
• The macro command is valid only once in a macro created on the macro edit
sheet. Its execution timing is set at the end of the macro on the edit sheet.
• When screen internal switching is disabled (the 13th bit of read area n+1 is
ON), the macro is invalid.
• [Function: Return] for the switch is valid even after using this command.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-210
 Others

SYS SYS (OUT_ENQ) F1

Function 1: Universal serial (interrupt)

All models
This macro command is used to execute an interrupt.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1
: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)
: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 OUT_ENQ 4
F1 10 - 2F HEX : ENQ No.
Transfer format
F1+1 0: Numerical
1: Characteristic
1 - 16384: Word count If F1+1 = 1
F1+2
2 - 32768: Number of bytes If F1+1 = 1
F1+3 Top address number
0: Non-wait Executes the next macro
F1+4 Executes the next macro after a
1: Wait
transmission is complete

Example
The following programs transmit the specified data to the host when the character
display ($u200) shows “ABCD.”
• Transfer data format: Numerical
$u100 = 10H (W) [ENQ No.]
$u101 = 0 (W) [Numerical]
$u102 = 2 (W) [Word count]
$u103 = 200 (W) [Top address]
$u104 = 0 (W) [Non-wait]
SYS (OUT_ENQ) $u100 Macro execution
Data received at the host: 3431343234333434H

• Transfer data format: Characteristic

$u100 = 10H (W) [ENQ No.]
$u101 = 1 (W) [Characteristic]
$u102 = 4 (W) [Number of bytes]
$u103 = 200 (W) [Top address number]
$u104 = 0 (W) [Non-wait]
SYS (OUT_ENQ) $u100
Data received at the host: 41424344H

Supplemental remarks
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error
* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-211
Others

Function 2: A-link+Net10 (network designation)

This macro command is used to designate a target network, with which a
All models connection will be established.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
Value Remarks
F0 OUT_ENQ
F1 0: Fixed
F1+1 2: Fixed
System code
F1+2 1: NET/10
2: NET II (/B)
0: Fixed If F1+2 = 2
F1+3
1: Network number If F1+2 = 2

Example
• $u100 = 0 (W) [Fixed]
$u101 = 2 (W) [Fixed]
$u102 = 1 (W) [NET/10]
$u103 = 3 (W) [Network number]
SYS (OUT_ENQ) $u100

According to the above program, the PLC connected to the V series accesses
the PLC NET 10 on network No. 3.

Supplemental remarks
• The macro command is valid when [A-link + Net10] is selected for [Select
PLC1 Type].
• Be sure to use the macro command in an OPEN macro for the screen. If it is
used in any other way, the network will change immediately after the
command is executed and a communication error will result.
• For more information, refer to the V9 Series Connection Manual.
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-212
 Others

SYS SYS (SET_SYS_CLND) F1

All models Function: System calendar setting

This macro command is used to set the values of seven words starting from the
address specified in [F1] to the system calendar.
The PLC calendar is not changed.

Available device memory

Internal device PLC 1 - 8 device
Memory card Constant
memory memory
F1

: Setting enabled (indirect designation disabled)

: Setting enabled (indirect designation enabled)

Setting range
4
Value
F0 SET_SYS_CLND
F1 0-: Year (4-digit/2-digit)
F1+1 1 - 12: Month
F1+2 1 - 31: Day
F1+3 0 - 23: Hour
F1+4 0 - 59: Minute
F1+5 0 - 59: Second
Invalid; to be automatically
F1+6 Day of the week
calculated by MONITOUCH

Example
• $u100 = 2005 (W)
$u101 = 7 (W)
$u102 = 15 (W) July 15, 2005 Friday 15:00:00
$u103 = 15 (W)
$u104 = 0 (W)
$u105 = 0 (W)
SYS (SET_SYS_CLND) $u00100
The above program sets the calendars in MONITOUCH to July 15, 2005 on
Friday at 15:00:00.

Supplemental remarks
• When setting calendar data for PLC 1 to 8, use a macro command
“ PLC_CLND” (page 4-88).
• The result of macro execution is stored in $s72.
Code (DEC) Contents
0* Normal
1 Execution error

* Select [System Setting]  [Unit Setting]  [Environment Setting], and check [Store the
result as normal upon successful completion of macro execution]. When this box is not
checked, the value will not be updated even if execution of the macro is successfully
completed. (Under development)

4-213
Others

Please use this page freely.

4-214
 www.monitouch.com

Sales 890-1, Kamikashiwano-machi, Hakusan-shi,

Ishikawa, 924-0035 Japan
TEL +81-76-274-2144 FAX +81-76-274-5136

1071NE0 40500000